Ag-C560p C550P PDF

Color 550 Printer
Color 560 Printer

Color 550 Printer
Color 560 Printer
Administrator Guide
Administrator Guide
Edition 1 January 2011 DE4632E2-1 898E 00390

Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.
and other countries.
Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
RSA and BSAFE are either registered trademarks or trademarks of RSA Security Inc. in the United
States and/or other countries.
RSA Security Inc. All right reserved.
All product/brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders.
Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
For information on license, refer to About License in the User Guide.
In this manual, safety instructions are preceded by the symbol .

Always read and follow the instructions before performing the required procedures.
The data saved in the hard disk of the machine may be lost if there is any problem in the hard disk.
Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any direct and indirect damages arising from or caused by such data
loss.
Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due to infection of computer virus or
computer hacking.
Important
1. This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not
be copied or modified in whole or part, without the written consent of the publisher.
2. Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
3. We welcome any comments on ambiguities, errors, omissions, or missing pages.
4. Never attempt any procedure on the machine that is not specifically described in this manual.
Unauthorized operation can cause faults or accidents. Fuji Xerox is not liable for any problems
resulting from unauthorized operation of the equipment.
An export of this product is strictly controlled in accordance with Laws concerning Foreign
Exchange and Foreign Trade of Japan and/or the export control regulations of the United States.
XEROX and the sphere of connectivity design are trademarks or registered trademarks of Xerox
Corporation in the U.S. or Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
DocuWorks is a trademark of Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents ........................................................................................................ 3
1 Before Using the Machine ........................................................................................ 9

Preface ...................................................................................................................... 10
Types of Manuals ...................................................................................................... 11
Using This Guide ....................................................................................................... 12
Organization of This Guide ................................................................................... 12
Conventions .......................................................................................................... 12
Energy Saver Mode................................................................................................... 14
Changing the Interval for Entering Energy Saver Mode ....................................... 14
Customizing the Control Panel .................................................................................. 17
Changing the Screen Default................................................................................ 17
Setting the Screen After Auto Clear...................................................................... 18
Assigning Services to <Custom> Buttons............................................................. 19
Adjusting Screen Brightness................................................................................. 21
Entering Text ............................................................................................................. 22
2 Paper and Other Media ........................................................................................... 23

Paper Types .............................................................................................................. 24
Loadable Quantity and Weight for Supported Paper ............................................ 24
Supported Paper Type.......................................................................................... 25
Loading Paper ........................................................................................................... 27
Loading Paper in Trays 1 and 2............................................................................ 28
Loading Paper in Tray 3........................................................................................ 28
Loading Paper in Tray 4........................................................................................ 29
Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass) ........................................................................ 30
Loading Tab Stock Paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass) ................................................. 31
Loading Paper in Tray 6 (A4 High Capacity Feeder) ............................................ 31
Loading Paper in Trays 6 and 7 (High Capacity Feeder C1-DS).......................... 32
Loading Tab Paper in Trays 6 and 7 (High Capacity Feeder C1-DS)................... 33
Loading Postcards in Trays 6 and 7 (High Capacity Feeder C1-DS) ................... 35
Facilitating Feeding of Heavyweight Paper Loaded in Trays 6 and 7 (High
Capacity Feeder C1-DS)....................................................................................... 36
Improving the Paper Feeding Performance in Trays 6 and 7 (High Capacity
Feeder C1-DS)...................................................................................................... 37
Loading Paper in Tray 8 (Interposer on Finisher D4 and Finisher D4 with
Booklet Maker)...................................................................................................... 38
Loading Tab Stock Paper in Tray 8 (Interposer on Finisher D4 and Finisher D4
with Booklet Maker) .............................................................................................. 38
Changing the Paper Size........................................................................................... 40
Changing the Paper Size for Trays 1 and 2.......................................................... 40
Changing the Paper Size for Tray 3...................................................................... 41
Changing the Paper Size for Tray 4...................................................................... 43
3
Changing the Paper Size for Tray 6 (A4 High Capacity Feeder)...........................44
Changing the Paper Size for Trays 6 and 7 (High Capacity Feeder C1-DS).........46
Changing the Paper Settings .....................................................................................47
3 Maintenance..............................................................................................................51
Replacing Consumables ............................................................................................52
Replacing Toner Cartridges...................................................................................54
Replacing Waste Toner Container.........................................................................56
Replacing Drum Cartridge R1 (For Customers Having a Time and Material
Contract) ................................................................................................................58
Replacing Drum Cartridges R2, R3, or R4 (For Customers Having a Time
and Material Contract) ...........................................................................................62
Replacing the Staple Cartridge (For Finisher C2 or Finisher C2 with Booklet
Maker)....................................................................................................................66
Replacing the Booklet Staple Cartridge (For Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker) .....67
Replacing the Staple Cartridge (For Finisher D4 or Finisher D4 with Booklet
Maker)....................................................................................................................69
Replacing the Booklet Staple Cartridge (For Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker) .....70
Emptying the Punch Waste Container (For Finisher C2 or Finisher C2 with
Booklet Maker).......................................................................................................72
Emptying the Punch Waste Container (For Finisher D4 or Finisher D4 with
Booklet Maker).......................................................................................................73
Emptying the Staple Waste Container (For Finisher D4 or Finisher D4 with
Booklet Maker).......................................................................................................74
Cleaning the Machine.................................................................................................76
Cleaning the Exterior .............................................................................................76
Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass ............................................77
Cleaning the Document Presser and Narrow Glass Strip......................................77
Cleaning the Document Feeder Rollers.................................................................78
Executing Calibration .................................................................................................79
Printing a Report/List ..................................................................................................82
4 Machine Status .........................................................................................................83

Overview of Machine Status.......................................................................................84
Machine Information ...................................................................................................85
General Information ...............................................................................................85
Paper Tray Status..................................................................................................87
Print Reports..........................................................................................................87
Overwrite Hard Disk...............................................................................................91
Faults..........................................................................................................................92
Supplies......................................................................................................................93
Billing Information .......................................................................................................94
Billing Information ..................................................................................................94
User Account Billing Information............................................................................95
4
Table of Contents
5 Tools ......................................................................................................................... 97
System Settings Procedure ....................................................................................... 98
Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode ...................................................... 98
Step 2 Entering the System Administrator User ID and Passcode ....................... 98
Step 3 Selecting [Tools] ........................................................................................ 99
Step 4 Selecting a Setting Item on the [Tools] Screen ......................................... 99
Step 5 Setting a Feature ..................................................................................... 100
Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode ....................................................... 100
Tools Menu List ....................................................................................................... 101
Common Service Settings ....................................................................................... 108
Machine Clock/Timers ........................................................................................ 108
Audio Tones........................................................................................................ 111
Screen/Button Settings ....................................................................................... 112
Paper Tray Settings ............................................................................................ 113
Image Quality Adjustment................................................................................... 118
Reports ............................................................................................................... 119
Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 120
Watermark .......................................................................................................... 122
Force Annotation................................................................................................. 123
Print Universal Unique ID.................................................................................... 124
Notify Job Completion by E-mail......................................................................... 125
Other Settings ..................................................................................................... 125
Copy Service Settings ............................................................................................. 133
Copy Tab - Features Allocation .......................................................................... 133
Preset Buttons .................................................................................................... 134
Copy Defaults ..................................................................................................... 134
Copy Control ....................................................................................................... 139
Original Size Defaults ......................................................................................... 141
Reduce/Enlarge Presets ..................................................................................... 141
Custom Colors .................................................................................................... 142
Annotations - Create Comments......................................................................... 142
Connectivity & Network Setup ................................................................................. 142
Print Service Settings .............................................................................................. 142
Scan Service Settings ............................................................................................. 143
First Tab.............................................................................................................. 143
Scan Defaults...................................................................................................... 143
Scan to PC Defaults............................................................................................ 145
Original Size Defaults ......................................................................................... 145
Output Size Defaults ........................................................................................... 146
Reduce/Enlarge Presets ..................................................................................... 146
Other Settings ..................................................................................................... 146
Email Service Settings............................................................................................. 148
Folder Service Settings ........................................................................................... 148
Job Flow Service Settings ....................................................................................... 148
5
Stored File Settings ..................................................................................................148
Network Controller Settings......................................................................................149
Connectivity & Network Setup .............................................................................149
Setup ........................................................................................................................151
Create Folder.......................................................................................................151
Stored Programming............................................................................................151
Create Job Flow Sheet ........................................................................................151
Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword .........................................................................151
Add Address Book Entry......................................................................................151
Paper Tray Attributes...........................................................................................151
Accounting................................................................................................................152
Create/View User Accounts.................................................................................152
Reset User Accounts ...........................................................................................154
System Administrators Meter (Copy Jobs) .........................................................155
Accounting Type ..................................................................................................155
Accounting Login Screen Settings.......................................................................156
Accounting/Billing Device Settings ......................................................................156
Authentication/Security Settings...............................................................................158
System Administrator Settings.............................................................................158
Authentication ......................................................................................................159
Allow User to Disable Active Settings..................................................................163
Job Status Default ...............................................................................................163
Overwrite Hard Disk.............................................................................................164
6 Authentication and Accounting Features ............................................................167

Overview of Authentication and Accounting Feature ...............................................168
Overview of Authentication Feature.....................................................................168
Overview of Accounting Feature..........................................................................169
Authentication...........................................................................................................170
User Types Managed by Authentication Feature ................................................170
User Roles and Authorization Groups .................................................................171
Types of Authentication .......................................................................................171
Types of Account Administration .........................................................................172
Authentication and Accounting Relationship .......................................................172
Services Controlled by Authentication......................................................................173
Overview..............................................................................................................173
Services Restricted by User ID Authentication ....................................................173
Configuration for Authentication ...............................................................................174
Enabling Authentication .......................................................................................174
Changing the Default Authorization Group Settings ............................................175
Creating an Authorization Group .........................................................................176
Configuration for Account Administration .................................................................177
Step 1 Selecting an Accounting Type..................................................................177
Step 2 Registering User Information....................................................................177
6
Table of Contents
7 Problem Solving ................................................................................................... 179

Troubleshooting....................................................................................................... 180
Machine Trouble...................................................................................................... 181
Image Quality Trouble ............................................................................................. 185
Trouble during Copying ........................................................................................... 191
Unable to Copy ................................................................................................... 191
The Copy Result is Not What was Expected ...................................................... 192
Error Code ............................................................................................................... 195
Other Errors ........................................................................................................ 219
Paper Jams ............................................................................................................. 220
Paper Jams in Trays 1 and 2 .............................................................................. 221
Paper Jams in Tray 3.......................................................................................... 221
Paper Jams in Tray 4.......................................................................................... 222
Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass)........................................................................... 222
Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass) with High Capacity Feeder C1-DS.................... 223
Paper Jams in Tray 6 (A4 High Capacity Feeder) .............................................. 224
Paper Jams in Trays 6 and 7 (High Capacity Feeder C1-DS) ............................ 226
Paper Jams in Tray 8 (Interposer on Finisher D4 and Finisher D4 with Booklet
Maker)................................................................................................................. 229
Paper Jams in the Transfer Module.................................................................... 229
Paper Jams in the Bottom Left Cover ................................................................. 231
Paper Jams in the Bottom Right Cover............................................................... 232
Paper Jams in the Output Tray ........................................................................... 233
Paper Jams in the Finisher C2 and the Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker............ 234
Paper Jams Inside the Finisher Left Cover (For Finisher D4 or Finisher D4
with Booklet Maker) ............................................................................................ 243
Paper Jams Inside the Finisher Right Cover (For Finisher D4 or Finisher D4
with Booklet Maker) ............................................................................................ 246
Paper Jams Inside the Z-Folder (For Finisher D4 or Finisher D4 with Booklet
Maker)................................................................................................................. 249
Paper Jams at the Output Area of the Finisher................................................... 252
Paper Jams in the Interface Module ................................................................... 254
Document Jams....................................................................................................... 257
Stapler Faults .......................................................................................................... 260
Staple Jams in Staple Cartridge (For Finisher C2 or Finisher C2 with Booklet
Maker)................................................................................................................. 261
Staple Jams in the Booklet Staple Cartridge (For Finisher C2 with Booklet
Maker)................................................................................................................. 262
Staple Jams in the Staple Cartridge (For Finisher D4 or Finisher D4 with
Booklet Maker).................................................................................................... 264
Staple Jams in the Booklet Staple Cartridge (For Finisher D4 with Booklet
Maker)................................................................................................................. 265
Re-inserting the Staple Cartridge into the Cartridge Unit ........................................ 267
Correcting the Curl of Outputs (When Finisher D4 or Finisher D4 with Booklet
Maker is Installed) ................................................................................................... 269
7
8 Appendix .................................................................................................................271
Specifications ...........................................................................................................272
Optional Components...............................................................................................281
Alignment Adjustment Settings ................................................................................282
Alignment Adjustment..........................................................................................282
Alignment Adjustment Settings............................................................................283
Skew Adjustment .................................................................................................286
Perpendicularity Adjustment ................................................................................287
Scale Adjustment.................................................................................................288
Print Position Adjustment.....................................................................................289
Adjust Fold Position..................................................................................................291
Fold Position Adjustment .....................................................................................291
Single Fold Position Adjustment ..........................................................................294
Booklet Position Adjustment ................................................................................295
C Fold Position Adjustment .................................................................................296
Z Fold Position Adjustment..................................................................................297
Z Fold Half Sheet Position Adjustment ................................................................298
Adjust Image Transfer ..............................................................................................300
Image Transfer Adjustment .................................................................................300
Notes and Restrictions .............................................................................................304
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine..............................................304
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Copy Feature .....................................304
Notes and Restrictions on the Interrupt Mode .....................................................305
Index...............................................................................................................................307
8
1 Before Using the Machine
This chapter describes the organization of this guide and conventions used in
this guide.
z Preface ....................................................................................................... 10
z
Types of Manuals .......................................................................................11
z
Using This Guide ........................................................................................ 12
z Energy Saver Mode .................................................................................... 14
z
Customizing the Control Panel ...................................................................17
z
Entering Text .............................................................................................. 22
Preface
Thank you for selecting Color 550/560 Printer (hereafter referred to as the machine).
Before Using the Machine
This guide is intended for system administrators, and provides maintenance

information such as how to replace consumables, how to configure network, and
troubleshooting procedures.
The guide assumes that you are familiar with a personal computer and that you are
knowledgeable of computer networks. When you need additional information, refer to
the manuals provided with the personal computer, operating system, and network
products.
After reading this guide, be sure to keep it handy for quick reference. It will be useful in
case you forget how to perform operations or if a problem occurs with the machine.
For more information on how to copy and scan, refer to the User Guide.
1 The Print Server is used to utilize the print feature. For capabilities of and how to
operate the Print Server, refer to the manual supplied with your Print Server.
10
Types of Manuals
Types of Manuals
The following guides are provided with the machine.

Accompanying Manuals
User Guide
The guide describes all the necessary steps for copy and scan.
Administrator Guide (this guide)

The guide is intended for system administrators, and describes how to solve problems
that may occur with the machine. This guide also describes daily maintenance and the
system settings procedures.
1
11
Using This Guide
This guide is intended for system administrators, and provides maintenance

information such as how to replace consumables, and troubleshooting procedures.
Organization of This Guide

This guide consists of the following chapters.

Describes the organization of this guide and conventions.
2 Paper and Other Media

1 Describes the types of paper and other media that you can use on the machine and
how to load media in a tray.
3 Maintenance
Describes how to replace consumables and to clean the machine.
4 Machine Status
Describes how to check the faults that occurred on the machine and to print various
reports/lists.
5 Tools
Describes the procedures to set up the system.
6 Authentication and Account Administration

The machine has the Authentication feature to restrict the availability of services for
each feature and the Accounting feature to manage the use of each feature based on
the Login Type selected.
7 Problem Solving
Describes troubleshooting procedures to solve the problems with the machine.
8 Appendix
Describes the specifications of the machine, optional accessories, and cautions/
restrictions.
Conventions
z
The screen shots and illustrations used in this guide vary depending on the machine
configuration and optional components installed. Some of the items in the screen
shots may not be displayed or available depending on your machine configuration.
z
The procedures in this guide may vary depending on the driver and utility software
being used due to the upgrades.
z In this document, "Computer" refers to a personal computer or workstation.
z
The following terms are used in this guide:
Important : Important information that you should read.
Note : Additional information on operations or features.
12
Using This Guide
z The following symbols are used in this guide:

" " : A cross-reference included in this guide.
Names of CD-ROM, features, and touch screen messages
and input text.

[ ] : Folders, files, applications, button or menu names displayed
on the touch screen.
Names of menus, commands, windows, or dialog boxes
displayed on the computer screen and their buttons and
menu names.
< > button : Hardware buttons on the control panel.
< > key : Keys on the keyboard of the computer.
> : Path to a certain item within a procedure on the control panel.
For example: When you see the procedure "select [Tools] >
[Setup] > [Create Folder]", this means that you need to select 1
[Tools], select [Setup], and then select [Create Folder].
Path to a certain item within a procedure on a computer.
For example: When you see the procedure "to search for files
and folders, click [Start] > [Search] > [For Files or Folders]",
this means that you need to click [Start], click [Search], and
then click [For Files or Folders] to search for files and folders.
Cross-reference
For example: "Refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service
Settings" > "Audio Tone" in the Administrator Guide."
The sentence above means that you need to refer to the
section "Audio Tone", which can be found under "Common
Service Settings" in chapter 5 Tools of the Administrator
Guide.
z Orientation of documents or paper is described in this guide as follows:
, ,Long Edge Feed (LEF): Loading the document or paper in portrait orientation
when viewed from the front of the machine.
, ,Short Edge Feed (SEF): Loading the document or paper in landscape
orientation when viewed from the front of the machine.
LEF Orientation SEF Orientation
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction
13
Energy Saver Mode
The machine is equipped with the Energy Saver mode that reduces the power
consumption by saving the electricity to the machine when no copy or print data is
received for a specified time.
The Energy Saver feature has two modes: Low Power mode and Sleep mode.
The machine enters the Low Power mode after the preset time has elapsed if the
machine is left unused for a fixed period of time.
The machine then enters the Sleep mode if a further preset time elapses.
To enter the Energy Saver mode, press the <Energy Saver> button on the control
panel.
Low Power Mode

1 In this mode, the power to the control panel and fusing unit is lowered to save power.
The touch screen goes out, and the <Energy Saver> button on the control panel lights
up. To use the machine, press the <Energy Saver> button. The <Energy Saver> button
goes out to indicate that the Low Power mode is exited.
Sleep Mode
In this mode, the power being sent to parts, such as the hard disk, is cut off and the
power is lowered even more than in the Low Power mode.
The touch screen goes out, and the <Energy Saver> button on the control panel lights
up. To use the machine, press the <Energy Saver> button. The <Energy Saver> button
goes out to indicate that the Sleep mode is exited.
It takes longer for the machine to recover from Sleep mode than from Low Power mode.
Changing the Interval for Entering Energy Saver Mode

This section describes the procedures for setting the Energy Saver mode.
To activate the Energy Saver, set the time to elapse until the machine enters the Low
Power mode as well as the time to elapse until the machine enters the Sleep mode.
Note You can set the time to elapse until the machine enters the Low Power mode and the Sleep
mode from 1 to 240 minutes in 1 minute increments.
1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.
<Log In/Out> button
14
Energy Saver Mode
2 Enter the system administrators user ID with

the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next]

and enter the system administrators
passcode, and select [Enter].
Note The default user ID is "11111".
The default passcode is "x-admin".
3 Select [Tools] on the [Services Home]

screen.
Note When the [Services Home] screen is not
displayed on the touch screen, press the
<Services Home> button.
1
4 Select [System Settings] > [Common
Service Settings] > [Machine Clock/Timers].
5 Select [Energy Saver Timers], and then

select [Change Settings].
Note Select [ ] to display the previous screen
or [ ] to display the next screen.
6 Using [ ] and [ ], set the time to elapse until

entering the Energy Saver mode, in 1 minute
increments.
From Last Operation to Low Power Mode

Set the time to elapse from the last operation until the machine enters the Low Power
mode.
Note The default value for [From Last Operation to Low Power Mode] is [1] minute. You cannot
disable the Low Power mode.
From Last Operation to Sleep Mode

Set the time to elapse from the last operation until the machine enters the Sleep mode.
Note The default value for [From Last Operation to Sleep Mode] is [50] minutes. You must set a
longer period of time for [From Last Operation to Sleep Mode] than for [From Last Operation
to Low Power Mode].
15
7 Select [Save].
8 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
9 Select [Close].
16
Customizing the Control Panel
You can change the services displayed on the touch screen or the features assigned

to the buttons to make best use of the machine.
This section describes how to change the screen default, the services displayed after
Auto Clear, and the services assigned to the <Custom> buttons, and how to adjust the
screen brightness.
For information on how to change the other settings of the control panel, refer to "Screen/Button
Settings" (P.112).
Changing the Screen Default

You can change the screen displayed when the machine is turned on or the Energy
Saver mode is deactivated. 1
The [Services Home] screen is displayed by factory default.
<Log In/Out> button


screen.

Service Settings] > [Screen/Button Settings].
17
5 Select [Screen Default], and then select

[Change Settings].
6 Select a service you want to display.

Important [E-mail], [Store to Folder], [Scan to PC],
[Store & Send Link], [Send from Folder],
and [Job Flow Sheets] cannot be used on
this machine.
1
7 Select [Save].
Setting the Screen After Auto Clear

You can select the screen to be displayed after Auto Clear from [Last Selection Screen]
or [Services Home].
For information on Auto Clear, refer to "Auto Clear" (P.109).
<Log In/Out> button


screen.
18


5 Select [Screen After Auto Clear], and then
1
6 Select [Last Selection Screen] or [Services
Home].
7 Select [Save].
Assigning Services to <Custom> Buttons

You can assign services to the <Custom 1> to <Custom 3> buttons on the control
panel.
Assigning a service to a <Custom> button allows you to switch to this service without
having to return to the [Services Home] screen. If you do not need to assign any service
to a <Custom> button, select [(Not Set)].
[Copy] is assigned to the <Custom 1> button and [Review] is assigned to the <Custom
3> button, while the <Custom 2> button has no assignment.
This section describes how to assign [Stored Programming] to the <Custom 2> button,
as an example.
Note After you change the assignment, apply the labels provided with the machine. When you
assign a service for which no label is provided, use a blank label and write down the service
name with a permanent marker. The labels include the services that are not supported by
the machine.
<Log In/Out> button
19



screen.
1
5 Select [Custom Button 2], and then select

[Change Settings].
6 Select [Stored Programming].

Important Only [(Not Set)], [Copy], [Simple Copy],
[Network Scanning], and [Stored
Programming] can be selected.
7 Select [Save].
20
Adjusting Screen Brightness

You can adjust the screen brightness of the screen on the [Services Home] screen.
1 Select [Screen Brightness] on the [Services Home] screen.

2 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the screen
brightness.
3 Select [Save].
To adjust the screen brightness from the [Tools] screen, refer to "Screen Brightness" (P.113). 1
21
Entering Text
During operations, a screen for entering text sometimes appears. The following
describes how to enter text.
1 You can enter the following characters: numerals, alphabets, and symbols.
Item Description
Entering alphabets and numerals To enter uppercase letters, select [Shift]. To return to the
lowercase letters, select [Shift] again.
Entering symbols Select [More Characters].
Note Depending on the keyboard, you can select a
symbol from the pull-up options displayed on the
bottom left of the screen.
Entering a space Select [Space].
Deleting characters Select [Backspace] to delete one character at a time.
22
This chapter describes the paper that can be used with the machine,
precautions when handling paper, and how to load paper in trays.
z Paper Types ............................................................................................... 24
z
Loading Paper ............................................................................................ 27
z
Changing the Paper Size ............................................................................40
z Changing the Paper Settings...................................................................... 47
Paper Types
This section describes the paper that can be used with this machine.
Use of unrecommended paper may result in paper jams, lower print quality,
malfunctions, or damage to the machine. To achieve optimum performance of the
machine, we recommend that you use only paper recommended by Fuji Xerox.
Paper and Other Media
If you desire to use paper other than the paper recommended by Fuji Xerox, contact
your local Fuji Xerox representative.
WARNING
Do not use conductive paper such as origami paper, carbonic paper or conductively-
coated paper. When paper jam occurs, it may cause short-circuit and eventually a
fire accident.
Important Moisture generated by water, rain, or vapor may cause the printed images to be degraded or
to fade. For more information, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
2
Loadable Quantity and Weight for Supported Paper
When using commonly used paper (known as printable paper) for copying, make sure
that it complies with the following specifications.
Paper Trays Basis Weight/Ream Weight Loadable Quantity
Trays 1 and 2 64 to 220 gsm 500 sheets

Ream Weight: 55 - 189.1 kg (80 gsm)
Tray 3 870 sheets

(80 gsm)
Tray 4 1,140 sheets

(80 gsm)
Tray 5 (bypass) 64 to 300 gsm Up to 27mm 250 sheets

Ream Weight: 55 - 257.9 kg (80 gsm)
Tray 6 (A4 High Capacity 64 to 220 gsm 2,000 sheets

Feeder) (optional) Ream Weight: 55 - 189.1 kg (80 gsm)
Trays 6 and 7 (High 64 to 300 gsm 2,000 sheets
Capacity Feeder C1-DS) Ream Weight: 55 - 257.9 kg (80 gsm) x 2
(optional)
Tray 8 (Interposer on 64 to 220 gsm 200 sheets
Finisher D4) (optional) Ream Weight: 55 - 189.1 kg (80 gsm)
Important Printing on paper that differs from the paper type and size selected in the print server, or
printing from a tray that does not support the loaded paper may result in a paper jam. To
ensure correct printing, select the correct paper size, paper type, and paper tray.
Note Basis weight is the weight of 1 m2 of a paper sheet.
Ream weight is the weight of 1,000 sheets of duodecimo size (788 x 1,091 mm) paper.
When copying on non-standard size paper from Tray 5, you must enter the paper size.
Furthermore, if you frequently copy on non-standard size paper, you can preset the size on
the machine. That size then appears under [Standard Sizes] on the [Tray 5] screen. For
more information on the settings, refer to "Tray 5 - Paper Size Defaults" (P.115).
Optimum image quality on the paper can be obtained by setting the image quality for each
type of paper. For more information on the settings, refer to "Image Quality" (P.116).
When loading postcards (100 x 148 mm) in the optional High Capacity Feeder C1-DS, the
Postcard Kit is required.
24
Paper Types
Supported Paper Type
Standard Paper
When printing or copying on commonly used paper (plain paper), use paper meeting
the standards described below. To copy or print as clear as possible, we recommend
the following standard paper.

Paper Weight (gsm) and Paper Type
FX P Paper 64 : Plain
Colortech + 90 : Plain
FX-J 82 : Plain
FX-JD 98 : Plain
FXK-H 80 : Plain
FX-J
NO. 1 (Xerox Brand)
98 : Plain
80 : Plain
2
Premier 80 : Plain
Business 80 : Plain
Purple Wrap 80 : Plain
Premier A4 80 : Plain
Business (Blue) 80 : Plain
For more information on selecting the paper type setting for the paper loaded on a tray, refer to
"Changing the Paper Settings" (P.47).
For more information on setting or adjusting the image quality for each paper type to obtain optimum
image quality on the paper, refer to "Image Quality" (P.116).
Semi Standard Paper

In addition to the standard paper, the following paper also can be used.
Paper Weight (gsm) and Paper Type
Indagit 75 : Plain
No. GA (Package: Green) 80 : Plain

No. ZA (Package: Orange) 70 : Plain
White & Red Label 70 : Plain
Performer 80 : Plain
Gold Flag Ship 80 : Plain
For more information on selecting the paper type setting for the paper loaded on a tray, refer to
"Changing the Paper Settings" (P.47).
For more information on setting or adjusting the image quality for each paper type to obtain optimum
image quality on the paper, refer to "Image Quality" (P.116).
25
Unusable Paper
Using paper not recommended by Fuji Xerox and transparencies may cause a paper
jam or machine malfunction. Use paper recommended by Fuji Xerox.
z Color transparency sheets (bordered with a white frame)
z
Pre-printed paper printed on another printer or offset press
z Pre-printed paper printed on this printer
z Inkjet paper
z
Tracing paper
z Folded, creased, or curled paper
z Label sheets whose face sheet surface does not cover the entire backing sheet
z
Envelopes with sticky adhesive
z Multi-color printed postcard
2 Storing and Handling Paper
Please keep the following points in mind when storing paper

z Store paper inside a cabinet or other dry place. Paper that has absorbed moisture
can cause paper jams and image quality defects.
z
After opening a package of paper, wrap up the remaining paper to store it. It is
recommended that you include moisture prevention packets.
z Paper should be stored flat to prevent bends or warping.
Please adhere to the following points when setting paper into a tray
z Align the stack of paper neatly before setting it in a tray.
z Do not use paper that is folded, creased, or heavily warped.
z
Do not use waved or curled paper.
z Do not load paper of mixed sizes together into a tray.
z Transparencies and labels can cause paper jams, and multiple sheets can be fed to
the printer at once. Be sure to carefully fan these types of paper.
z When continuously outputting onto transparencies, transparency sheets may
sometimes stick to each other. Remove transparencies from the output tray every 20
or so sheets, and fan them to cool them down.
26
Loading Paper
Loading Paper
This section describes how to load paper.
Types of paper loaded in trays

The machine automatically detects the size and orientation of loaded paper in a tray,

but not a paper type. Normally, each tray is set to plain paper. When loading paper
other than plain paper, you must change the paper type setting. You can name paper
types and can set up to five paper types as user-defined paper.
For information on changing the paper type settings, refer to "Changing the Paper Settings" (P.47).
Automatic Tray Selection

When making copies, automatic tray selection is active if [Auto Select] is selected for
[Paper Supply]. If the machine detects two or more corresponding trays in the
automatic tray selection, the machine gives higher priority to the tray having the highest
[Paper Type Priority] set at [Paper Type Settings].
A tray may not be targeted during automatic tray selection depending on what is 2
selected in [Auto Paper Select] for the paper tray.
For information on the setting for [Auto Paper Select], refer to "Change Settings" (P.113).
Note Tray 5 (bypass) cannot be selected in automatic tray selection.
When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, select a tray containing the
paper of the same size and orientation that was being used for copying or printing, and
continue copying or printing (Auto Tray Switching feature). During this operation, the
machine cannot switch to a tray containing a paper type for which the [Paper Type Priority]
setting is set to [Auto Paper Off].
For information about [Paper Type], [Paper Type Priority], and [Paper Tray Priority] settings, and the
paper substitute feature, refer to "Paper Tray Settings" (P.113).
Adding paper
When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, a message appears on
the touch screen. Add paper according to the message instructions. Copying or printing
automatically resumes when paper is added.
Note Carefully fan the paper before loading it in a tray. Otherwise, the paper may stick together,
resulting in paper jams, or multiple sheets being fed to the machine simultaneously.
27
Loading Paper in Trays 1 and 2

The following describes the procedures to load paper in Trays 1 and 2.
resulting in paper jams.
For information on changing the paper size and orientation, refer to "Changing the Paper Size for Trays
1 and 2" (P.40).
1 Pull out the tray until it stops.
CAUTION
Be sure to pull out the paper tray slowly. If
pulled out with too much force, the tray
may hit and injure your knees or other
2 parts of your body.
Important While the machine is processing a job, do

not pull out the tray that is being used for
the job.
To prevent paper jams or erroneous detection of loaded paper in a tray by the machine, do
not add paper on top of any remaining paper in the tray. Remove any remaining paper in the
tray, and then load that paper on top of the newly loaded paper.
2 Load and align the edge of the paper against

the left edge of the tray, with the side to be
copied or printed on facing down.
Important Do not load paper above the maximum fill
line ("MAX" in the right illustration). It may
cause paper jams or machine
malfunction.
Do not place any paper or objects in the
empty space on the right side of Trays 1
and 2. It may cause paper jams or
machine malfunction.
3 Push the tray in gently until it comes to a stop.

Important When inserting the tray, push it gently. Forcibly pushing in the tray may cause machine
malfunction.
Loading Paper in Tray 3

The following describes the procedures to load paper in Tray 3.
For information on changing the paper size and orientation, refer to "Changing the Paper Settings"
(P.47).
28
Loading Paper
CAUTION
parts of your body.

the job.

copied or printed on facing down. 2
line ("MAX" in the illustration). It may
malfunction.

malfunction.
Loading Paper in Tray 4

The following describes the procedure for loading paper in Tray 4.
(P.47).
CAUTION
parts of your body.

the job.
29

line ("MAX" in the right illustration). It may
malfunction.
3 Push the tray in gently until it comes to a

stop.
malfunction.
Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass)

2 When printing or copying on a size or type of paper that cannot be set in Trays 1 to 4,
or Trays 6 (optional) or 7 (optional), use Tray 5 (bypass). The following describes the
procedure for loading paper in Tray 5.
Important To prevent paper jams and erroneous detection of paper loaded in the tray by the machine,
do not take out paper of a package until the tray runs out of paper.
Note Carefully fan paper before loading it in a tray. Otherwise, the paper may stick together,
1 Open Tray 5.
Note If necessary, pull out the extension tray.
The extension tray can be extended in
two stages. Pull out the extension tray
gently.
2 Adjust the paper guides to the size of the

paper to be loaded.
3 Load paper with the side to be copied or

printed on facing up, inserting the paper until
its edge lightly touches against the paper
feed entrance.
Important Do not load mixed paper types into the
tray.
Do not load paper above the maximum fill
malfunction.
30
Loading Paper
4 When using non-standard sized paper, make find adjustments aligning the paper
guides to the edges of the paper loaded.
Loading Tab Stock Paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass)

The following describes the procedure for loading tab paper in Tray 5 (bypass).

Important Tab paper can be used only for [Tab Margin Shift], and [Covers/Separators].
Note Carefully fan paper before loading it in a tray. Otherwise, the paper may stick together,
1 Open Tray 5.
Note If necessary, pull out the extension tray.
The extension tray can be extended in
two stages. Pull out the extension tray
gently.
2 Adjust the paper guides to the size of the

paper to be loaded.
3 Load paper with the side to be copied or

printed on facing up, inserting the paper until
its edge lightly touches against the paper
feed entrance.
Important Do not load mixed paper types into the
tray.
Do not load paper above the maximum fill
malfunction.
Loading Paper in Tray 6 (A4 High Capacity Feeder)

The following describes the procedure for loading paper in Tray 6 (A4 High Capacity
Feeder).
(P.47).
31
1 Pull out the tray towards you until it stops.
CAUTION
parts of your body.
Important While the machine processes a job, do

not pull the tray out that the job uses.
To prevent paper jams or misloading, do not load new paper into the tray until the tray is
empty. Remove any paper remaining in the tray and then load the paper on newly loaded
paper.

the right edge of the tray, with the side to be
copied or printed on facing up.
2 Important Do not load paper above the maximum fill
line. It may cause paper jams or machine
malfunction.

malfunction.
Loading Paper in Trays 6 and 7 (High Capacity Feeder C1-DS)

The following describes the procedure for loading paper in optional Trays 6 and 7 (High
Capacity Feeder C1-DS).
When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, a message is displayed
on the touch screen. Add paper according to the displayed instructions. Copying or
printing is automatically resumed when paper is loaded and the tray is closed.
Note Be sure to fan the paper well. Otherwise, paper may cause paper jams, and multiple sheets
may be fed to the printer at once.
For information about changing the paper size and orientation, refer to "Changing the Paper Size for
Trays 6 and 7 (High Capacity Feeder C1-DS)" (P.46).
The [Paper Tray Attributes] screen is displayed when you load paper in a tray. For more information,
refer to "Paper Tray Attributes" (P.113).
CAUTION
parts of your body.

32
Loading Paper
paper.
2 Remove any paper loaded on the tray.

3 Load a stack of paper (approximately 100 to
500 sheets) and align the edge of the paper
against the right edge of the tray with the

side to be copied or printed on facing up (1).
Move the long-side paper guide while
holding the grip so that they lightly contact
the edges of the paper (2).
4 Load the remaining paper and align the edge

of the paper against the right edge of the tray
with the side to be copied or printed on
facing up (1). Move the left short-side paper
2
guide while holding the grip so that they
lightly contact the edges of the paper (2).
Important Do not load paper exceeding the
maximum fill line. It may cause paper
jams or machine malfunctions.
If the paper stack loaded in the tray is 100
sheets or less, the guides apply more
pressure to the paper stack. It may cause distortion of paper stack, and may cause paper
jams.
Position the guides correctly to match the paper size. If the position of the guide is not
correct, the paper may not be fed properly and cause paper jams.
Loading Tab Paper in Trays 6 and 7 (High Capacity Feeder C1-DS)

The following describes the procedure for loading tab paper in optional Trays 6 and 7
(High Capacity Feeder C1-DS).
Important Tab paper can be used only for [Tab Margin Shift], and [Covers/Separators].
When heavyweight paper is loaded in the tray, be sure to make adjustment of the position of the weight
switch buttons. For more information, refer to "Facilitating Feeding of Heavyweight Paper Loaded in
33
CAUTION
parts of your body.

paper.

2 against the right edge of the tray with the
Important When loading tab paper, position the side
with the tab facing the left short-side
paper guide.

jams.
34
Loading Paper
Loading Postcards in Trays 6 and 7 (High Capacity Feeder C1-DS)

The following describes the procedure for loading postcards in optional Trays 6 and 7
(High Capacity Feeder C1-DS). When using postcards in Trays 6 and 7, be sure to
attach the Postcard Kit in the tray before loading the paper.

When heavyweight paper is loaded in the tray, be sure to make adjustment of the position of the weight
switch buttons. For more information, refer to "Facilitating Feeding of Heavyweight Paper Loaded in
CAUTION
2
parts of your body.

paper.
When you have pulled out the tray with the Postcard Kit attached, remove any paper
remaining in the tray and then load the paper again.

3 Insert the small protrusions of the guide into
the notch to the right side at the bottom of
the tray (1). Align the hole of the guide with
the front tray hole and rotate the screw
clockwise (2).

35

Note Do not load paper exceeding the

jams.
2 Note When removing the Postcard Kit, unscrew the screw completely and remove the guide.
Store the removed guide in a place you can easily remember.
Facilitating Feeding of Heavyweight Paper Loaded in Trays 6 and 7 (High

Capacity Feeder C1-DS)
The following describes how to make it easier to feed heavyweight paper loaded in
Trays 6 and 7 (High Capacity Feeder C1-DS).
Use the weight switches to adjust the air assist level. This helps the paper to be fed
smoothly. For the paper heavier than 256 gsm, slide the switch button to the heavier
weight group.
Important If 256 gsm or heavier paper is loaded in the tray, be sure to switch the button to the heavier
weight group. Otherwise, paper jams or malfunctions may occur.
CAUTION
parts of your body.

2 Slide the switches to the appropriate weight

setting.
36
Loading Paper
Improving the Paper Feeding Performance in Trays 6 and 7 (High

Capacity Feeder C1-DS)
This section describes how to improve the paper feeding performance.
If images are skewed even when paper is loaded correctly, use the following procedure
to feed paper more accurately.
Important If any of the following types of paper is loaded in the tray, performing the procedure in this

section may cause the paper to be fed improperly, resulting in paper jams.
- Heavyweight (221 gsm or more) - Tab Stock (221 gsm or more)
- Heavyweight Reload (221 gsm or more) - Labels (106 gsm or more)
- Hole Punched Heavyweight - Transparency
(221 gsm or more)
- Gloss (106 gsm or more) - Adhesive
- Gloss Reload (106 gsm or more)
CAUTION 2
parts of your body.

not pull out the tray.
2 Slide the switch on top of the long-side paper

guide to the right until it stops.
Note To return the switch to its original
position, slide it to the left until it stops.
3 If the paper feeding performance is not

improved after Step 2, slide the switch on the
right front side towards the back of the
machine until it stops.
Important To return the switch to its original
position, slide it towards you until it stops.
37
Loading Paper in Tray 8 (Interposer on Finisher D4 and Finisher D4 with

Booklet Maker)
The following describes the procedure for loading paper in optional Tray 8 (Interposer).
The Interposer allows you to load paper (blank, copied paper, etc.), which will only be
used as separators and covers, so that the machine does not output on the paper
loaded in this tray.
Note When adding paper to interposer, remove any paper remaining in the tray, add it to the stack
of paper to be added, then load all of the paper into the interposer at once.
1 Hold the center of the paper guides and slide

them to match the size of the paper to be
loaded.
2
2 Load the paper, neatly aligning all edges.
Loading Tab Stock Paper in Tray 8 (Interposer on Finisher D4 and

Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker)
The following describes the procedure for loading tab paper in optional Tray 8
(Interposer).
1 Hold the center of the paper guides and slide

them to mach the size of the paper to be
loaded.
38
Loading Paper
2 If the paper is already printed on, load the

paper with the printed side facing up and
with the tab side to be fed first.
A
A

2
39
Changing the Paper Size
This section describes how to change the paper size in Trays 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, and 7.
Note The types of paper in Trays 1 to 4, 6, and 7 are preset. Normally, Trays 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 and 7
are set to plain paper. When changing to a different paper type, change the paper quality
settings to match the type of paper to be loaded so that you can maintain high quality
printing.
For more information on paper type settings, refer to "Changing the Paper Settings" (P.47).
Non-standard size paper can be loaded in Trays 1 and 2. When loading non-standard size
paper, you must register the paper size. For information on registering paper sizes, refer to
"Paper Size" (P.114).
For more information on corresponding paper sizes, refer to "Paper Tray Settings" (P.113).
For more information on how to copy on non-standard size paper, refer to "3 Copy" > "Copy" > "Paper
Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying)" in the User Guide.
Important Do not load paper of mixed sizes together into a tray.
2 Changing the Paper Size for Trays 1 and 2

The following describes how to change paper size in Trays 1 and 2.
Note The types of paper in Trays 1 and 2 are preset. The available preset paper types are: Plain,
Recycled, Plain Reload, Punched, Letterhead, Transparency, Heavyweight, HW Reload,
Extra-HW, X-HW Reload, Hole Punched HW 1, Hole Punched HW 2, Gloss, Gloss Reload,
Heavyweight Gloss, HW Gloss Reload, Labels, Heavyweight Labels, Tab Stock, HW Tab
Stock, Pre-Printed, Custom 1 to 5, and normally, plain paper is set. When changing to a
different paper type, change the paper quality settings to match the type of paper to be
loaded so that you can maintain high quality printing.
Non-standard size paper can be loaded in Trays 1 and 2. When loading non-standard size
paper, you must register the paper size. For information on registering paper sizes, refer to
"Paper Tray Attributes" (P.113).
For more information on supported paper sizes, refer to "Paper Size Settings" (P.126).
For more information on how to copy on non-standard size paper, refer to "3 Copy" > "Copy" > "Paper
Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying)" in the User Guide.
CAUTION
parts of your body.

job.
not add paper on top of any remaining paper in the tray.
2 Remove any paper loaded in the tray.
40
3 While pinching the long-side paper guide, 2

move it to match the size of the paper to be
loaded (1). While pinching the short-side
paper guide, move it to match the size of the
paper to be loaded (2).
1
Note If loading tab paper, move the paper
guides to the edges of the tray, load the
paper, and then move the guides so that

they lightly contact the edges of the
paper.

the left side of the tray, with the side to be
line ("MAX" in the right illustration).
Do not place any paper or objects in the
empty space on the right side of Trays 1
and 2. It may cause paper jams or
2
machine malfunction.

malfunction.
Note Affix the paper size label to the front of the paper tray.
6 If you have changed the paper type, you need to change the tray settings.
Changing the Paper Size for Tray 3

The following describes how to change paper size in Tray 3.
Note The types of paper in Tray 3 are preset. The available preset paper types are: Plain,
Heavyweight Gloss, HW Gloss Reload, Labels, Heavyweight Labels, Pre-Printed, Custom 1
to 5, and normally, plain paper is set. When changing to a different paper type, change the
paper quality settings to match the type of paper to be loaded so that you can maintain high
quality printing.
41
CAUTION
parts of your body.

job.
not add paper on top of any remaining paper in the tray.
3 While pinching the paper guide, move the
guide to match the size of the paper to be
2 loaded.
paper, and move the guides so that they
lightly contact the edges of the paper.


malfunction.
Note Affix the paper size label to the front of the paper tray.
42
Changing the Paper Size for Tray 4

The following describes how to change paper size in Tray 4.
Note The types of paper in Tray 4 are preset. The available preset paper types are: Plain,
Heavyweight Gloss, HW Gloss Reload, Labels, Heavyweight Labels, Pre-Printed, Custom 1
to 5, and normally, plain paper is set. When changing to a different paper type, change the

paper quality settings to match the type of paper to be loaded so that you can maintain high
quality printing.
CAUTION
may hit and injure your knees or other 2
parts of your body.

job.
not add paper on top of any remaining paper in the tray. Remove any paper remaining in the
tray and then load the paper on newly loaded paper.

3 While pinching the paper guide, move the
guide to match the size of the paper to be
loaded.
paper, and move the guides so that they
lightly contact the edges of the paper.


malfunction.
43
Changing the Paper Size for Tray 6 (A4 High Capacity Feeder)
The following describes how to change paper size in Tray 6 (A4 High Capacity Feeder).
CAUTION

parts of your body.

job.
not add paper on top of any remaining paper in the tray. Remove any paper remaining in the
tray and then load the paper on newly loaded paper.
2
3 Open the end guide (1) and unscrew the
screw (2). Then remove the guide from the
tray.
4 Insert the small protrusions at the bottom of the guide into the holes corresponding to
the paper size (1). Then insert the screw into a hole corresponding to the paper size
on top of the guide and tighten the screw (2).
5 Unscrew the screw of the front guide and

remove the guide from the tray.
44
6 Insert the small protrusions at the bottom of the guide into the holes corresponding to
the paper size (1). Then insert the screw into a hole corresponding to the paper size
on the top of the guide and tighten the screw (2).

7 Pull up on the end guide lever (1) as shown
in the illustration. Move the guide to the
desired paper size (2) and then press down 2
on the lever (3).
Important Set the guide to gently touch the edge of
the paper. If the position of the guide is
not correct, the paper may not be fed
properly and may cause paper jams.
Note The slot on the left of 8.5 on the end guide
is not used.
8 Open the end guide (1). Load and align the
edge of the paper against the right edge of
the tray, with the side to be copied or printed
on facing up (2).
Note Do not load paper above the maximum fill
malfunctions.
9 Close the end guide tightly.

malfunction.
45
Changing the Paper Size for Trays 6 and 7 (High Capacity Feeder C1-DS)
The following describes how to change the paper size for Trays 6 and 7 (High Capacity
Feeder C1-DS).
CAUTION

parts of your body.

paper.
2 When you have pulled out the tray with the Postcard Kit attached, remove any paper
remaining in the tray and then load the paper again.


jams.
46
Changing the Paper Settings
This section describes how to change the paper type for Trays and how to set image
quality processing by the individual paper type.
After loading paper in a tray, specify the type of paper loaded and select the image
quality for the paper type. Setting the image quality for each paper type enables you to
print with the most suitable image quality for the paper type.

For information on image quality processing for each paper type, refer to "Image Quality" (P.116).
Note Users can name Custom 1 to Custom 5 displayed in the paper type settings. For information
on how to set names to Custom 1 to Custom 5, refer to "Custom Paper Name/Color"
(P.113).
You can change the paper type setting without entering to the System Administration mode
on the [Setup] screen, which is displayed by selecting [Setup] in the [Services Home] screen
if you configure the settings in advance. For more information, refer to "Customize Paper
Supply Screen" (P.114).

2
<Log In/Out> button


screen.

Service Settings] > [Paper Tray Settings].
47
5 Select [Paper Tray Attributes].

6 Select a paper tray for changing the paper

type setting under [Items].
7 Select [Change Settings].

2
8 Select the [Paper Type], [Paper Size],

[Paper Color], and [Auto Paper Select]
respectively.
Note The paper weight displayed in under
[Paper Type] varies depending on the
setting.
Select the paper weight in Step 12. Select
only the paper type in Step 8.
Important If the desired paper type is not displayed
under [Paper Type], select [Other Media Selection] to view all of the available paper types.
The available paper types are as follows.
- Plain A (64 - 79 gsm) - Plain B (80 - 90 gsm)
- Plain C (91 - 105 gsm) - Plain A Reloaded (64 - 79 gsm)
- Plain B Reloaded (80 - 90 gsm) - Plain C Reloaded (91 - 105 gsm)
- Recycled A (64 - 79 gsm) - Recycled B (80 - 90 gsm)
- Recycled C (91 - 105 gsm) - Heavyweight A (106 - 128 gsm)
- Heavyweight B (129 - 150 gsm) - Heavyweight C (151 - 176 gsm)
- HW A Reload (106 - 128 gsm) - HW B Reload (129 - 150 gsm)
- HW C Reload (151 - 176 gsm) - Extra-HW (177 - 220 gsm)
- X-HW Reload (177 - 220 gsm) - X-HW Plus (221 - 256 gsm)
- X-HW Plus Reload (221 - 256 gsm) - X-HW Plus 2 (257 - 300 gsm)
- X-HW Plus 2 Reload(257 - 300 gsm) - Punched HW 1A (106 -128 gsm)
- Punched HW 1B (127 - 150 gsm) - Punched HW 1C (151 - 176 gsm)
- Hole Punched HW 2 (177 - 220 gsm) - Hole Punched HW 3 (221 -256 gsm)
- Hole Punched HW 4 (257 - 300 gsm) - Gloss A (106 - 128 gsm)
- Gloss B (129 - 150 gsm) - Gloss A Reload (106 - 128 gsm)
- Gloss B Reload (129 - 150 gsm) - Coated 2A (151 - 176 gsm)
- Coated 2B (177 - 220 gsm) - Coated 2A RL (151 - 176 gsm)
- Coated 2B RL (177 - 220 gsm) - Coated 3A (221 - 256 gsm)
- Coated 3B (257 - 300 gsm) - Coated 3A RL (221 - 256 gsm)
- Coated 3B RL (257 - 300 gsm) - Labels 1A (106 - 128 gsm)
- Labels 1B (129 - 150 gsm) - Labels 1C (151 - 176 gsm
- Heavyweight Labels (177 - 220 gsm) - Labels 3A (221 - 256 gsm)
48
- Labels 3B (257 - 300 gsm) - Tab Stock 1A (106 - 128 gsm)

- Tab Stock 1B (129 - 150 gsm) - Tab Stock 1C (151 -176 gsm)
- HW Tab Stock (177 - 220 gsm) - X-HW Tab Stock (221 - 256 gsm)
- X-HW Tab Stock (257 - 300 gsm) - Transparency
- Custom Paper 1 to 5
9 Select [Cancel], [Save], [Close] or [Confirm] repeatedly until the [Paper Tray Settings]
screen is displayed.

10 Select [Image Quality].
11 Select the paper type for changing the image

quality settings under [Items], and then
2
12 Select the image quality, and then select

[Save].
13 Make sure that the paper type you selected is displayed under [Current Settings] of
[Items], and then select [Close].
15 Select [Close].
49
Paper and Other Media 2 Paper and Other Media
50
3 Maintenance
This chapter describes how to replace consumables, clean the machine,

calibrate colors, and print a report/list.
z Replacing Consumables............................................................................. 52
z
Cleaning the Machine ................................................................................. 76
z
Executing Calibration ..................................................................................79
z Printing a Report/List ..................................................................................82
3 Maintenance
Replacing Consumables
The machine is provided with the following consumables and periodic replacement
parts. We recommend the use of the following consumables as they are manufactured
to meet the specifications of the machine.
Type of Consumables/ Product

Quantity/Box
Periodic Replacement Parts Code
Toner Cartridge - Black CT201702 1 unit/box
Toner Cartridge - Cyan CT201703 1 unit/box
Toner Cartridge - Magenta CT201704 1 unit/box
Maintenance
Toner Cartridge - Yellow CT201705 1 unit/box

Drum Cartridge - Black CT350887 1 unit/box
Drum Cartridge - Color CT350888 1 unit/box
Waste Toner Container CWAA0663 1 unit/box
3 Staple Cartridge for Finisher C *1 CWAA0540 5,000 staples x 3 sets/box

Staple Cartridge for Finisher D4 *3 CWAA0677 5,000 staples x 4 sets/box
Staple Cartridge for Finisher C w/ BM *2
CWAA0749 5,000 staples x 4 sets/box,
Staple Cartridge for Finisher D4 w/ BM *4 Staple Scrap Container x 1
unit/box
*1 For Finisher C2
*2 For Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker
*3 For Finisher D4
*4 For Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker
Note We recommend that you always keep spare consumables/periodic replacement parts
available.
WARNING
z
Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off spilled toner. Never use a vacuum cleaner
for the spills. It may catch fire by electric sparks inside the vacuum cleaner and
cause explosion. If you spill a large volume of toner, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
z Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the cartridge
may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion.
If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative for its disposal.
z Never throw a waste toner container into an open flame. Toner may catch fire and
cause burn injuries or explosion.
If you have a used waste toner container no longer needed, contact your local Fuji
Xerox representative for its disposal.
52
CAUTION
z
Keep drum cartridges and toner cartridges out of the reach of children. If a child
accidentally swallows toner, spit it out, rinse mouth with water, drink water and
consult a physician immediately.
z
When replacing drum cartridges and toner cartridges, be careful not to spill the
toner. In case of any toner spills, avoid contact with clothes, skin, eyes and mouth
as well as inhalation.
z
If toner spills onto your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water.
If you get toner particles in your eyes, wash it out with plenty of water for at least
15 minutes until irritation is gone. Consult a physician if necessary.
If you inhale toner particles, move to a fresh air location and rinse your mouth with
water.
Maintenance
If you swallow toner, spit it out, rinse your mouth with water, drink plenty of water
and consult a physician immediately.
Handling consumables/periodic replacement parts

z Do not store boxes of consumables/periodic replacement parts upright.
z
Do not unpack consumables/periodic replacement parts before use. Avoid storing
3
consumables/periodic replacement parts in the following locations:
- In high temperature and humid locations
- Near heat-generating devices
- In direct sunlight
- in dusty locations
z
Use consumables/periodical replacement parts only as directed on their packages.
z We recommend always keeping spare consumables/periodic replacement parts
available.
z
When calling your local Fuji Xerox representative to order consumables/periodical
replacement parts, have the product codes ready.
z The use of consumables/periodic replacement parts not recommended by Fuji Xerox
could impair machine quality and performance. Use only consumables/periodic
replacement parts recommended by Fuji Xerox.
Checking the status of consumables

The status of consumables can be checked on the [Supplies] screen.
For information on consumables, refer to "Supplies" (P.93).
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Replacing Toner Cartridges ....................................................................................................... 54
Replacing Waste Toner Container ............................................................................................. 56
Replacing Drum Cartridge R1 (For Customers Having a Time and Material Contract) ........... 58
Replacing Drum Cartridges R2, R3, or R4 (For Customers Having a Time and Material Contract)..........62
Replacing the Staple Cartridge (For Finisher C2 or Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker) ............ 66
Replacing the Booklet Staple Cartridge (For Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker)....................... 67
Replacing the Staple Cartridge (For Finisher D4 or Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker)............ 69
Emptying the Punch Waste Container (For Finisher C2 or Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker)........ 72
Emptying the Punch Waste Container (For Finisher D4 or Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker) ....... 73
Emptying the Staple Waste Container (For Finisher D4 or Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker) ....... 74
53
3 Maintenance
Replacing Toner Cartridges

The machine comes with toner cartridges. The machine will display the following
messages when a toner cartridge is empty. Follow the messages and replace the toner
cartridge as necessary.
Message*1 Remaining Page Yield*2 Solution

Please order a Yellow Black: Approx. 1,800 pages You do not need to replace the
Toner [Y] Cartridge. Other than Black: Toner Cartridge immediately.
Approx. 1,200 pages Order the Toner Cartridge
displayed on the screen.
Yellow Toner [Y] Cartridge Replace the toner cartridge
-
needs to be replaced soon. with a new one.
Maintenance
*1 The above messages are indications for yellow toner replacement. The part name "Yellow Toner
[Y]" in the messages varies depending on the colors or number of the toner cartridges.
*2 The page yield after each message is displayed is for when A4 paper LEF ( ) is used. The value is
an estimate and varies depending on the conditions such as the content printed, dot coverage (area
coverage), paper size, paper type, copy density, output image type, and the machine operating
3 environment.
WARNING
z
representative.
z Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the cartridge
may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion.
If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox
Important When replacing a toner cartridge, toner may spill and soil the floor. We recommend laying
paper on the floor beforehand.
The use of toner cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade image quality and
performance. Use only toner cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox.
When the remaining amount of toner becomes small, the machine may stop printing and
display a message. If this occurs, replace the toner cartridge to resume copying.
Replace toner cartridges while the machine is on.
Copy density may decrease slightly after the message appears on the screen.
If a partially used toner cartridge is used, a message appears and the number of pages that
you can copy displayed on the screen may differ considerably.
Note Monochrome copying is available even when color toners run out. In this case, only plain
paper can be used.
1 Open the front cover.
54
2 Hold the handle of the toner cartridge of the

color indicated in the message and gently
pull it out.
Note "Y", "M", "C", or "K" indicates Yellow,
Magenta, Cyan, and Black, respectively.
3 Pull out the toner cartridge slowly, and slide

it out.
WARNING
Maintenance
Never throw a toner cartridge into an open
flame. Remaining toner in the cartridge
may catch fire and cause burn injuries or
explosion.
If you have a used toner cartridge no
longer needed, contact your local Fuji
3
Important Slide out the toner cartridge gently. Otherwise, toner may spill from the cartridge.
If you have a used toner cartridge which is no longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox
4 Take the new toner cartridge of the same

color out of the box, and shake the cartridge
up and down and left and right several times.
5 Push the cartridge in gently until it comes to

a stop.
Note Be sure to push in the cartridge until you
hear it click into place.
6 Close the toner cover.

Note If the toner cover is not completely closed, a message will appear and the machine will
remain paused.
55
3 Maintenance
Replacing Waste Toner Container

The waste toner container holds used toner. The following messages are displayed on
the touch screen according to the status of the waste toner container. Follow the
messages.
Message Remaining Page Yield*1 Solution

Please order a Waste Approx. 3,000 pages Order the waste toner
Toner Container. container.
The Waste Toner The machine will stop. Replace
Container needs to be - the waste toner container with
replaced. a new one.
Maintenance
*1 The remaining page yield for copy jobs is applicable when A4 paper LEF ( ) is used. The value is
an estimate and varies depending on the conditions such as the content printed, dot coverage (area
coverage), paper size, paper type, copy density, output image type, and machine operating
environment.
3 WARNING
z
representative.
z Never throw a waste toner container into an open flame. Toner may catch fire and
cause burn injuries or explosion.
If you have a used waste toner container no longer needed, contact your local Fuji
Important When you replace the waste toner container, toner may spill and soil the floor. We
recommend laying paper on the floor beforehand.
The proper disposal of used waste toner containers is required. Return the old waste toner
container to your local Fuji Xerox representative.
The use of waste toner containers not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade image
quality and performance. Use only waste toner containers recommended by Fuji Xerox.
1 Make sure that the machine is not operating,

and open the front cover.
56
2 Open the waste toner container cover.
3 Pull out the waste toner container halfway.
Maintenance
4 Hold the center part on the top edge of the 3
used waste toner container and pull it out
from the machine.
5 Use both hands to carefully place the used

waste toner container into the plastic bag
supplied with the new waste toner container.
Important Return used waste toner containers to
Be sure to put the used waste toner
container in the dedicated plastic bag
supplied with the new waste toner
container.
6 Hold the center part on the top edge of a

new container and insert it into the machine
until it comes to a stop.
7 Close the waste toner container cover.

8 Close the front cover.
Note If the front cover is not completely closed, a message will appear and the machine will
remain paused.
57
3 Maintenance
Replacing Drum Cartridge R1 (For Customers Having a Time and Material

Contract)
The machine displays the message "Please order a Drum Cartridge R1" when a drum
cartridge needs to be replaced. When the message is displayed, contact your local Fuji
Xerox representative.
For customers having a Time and Material Contract, refer to this section and locate the
position or the indicated drum cartridge (R1), and replace the drum cartridge.
If you continue to copy without replacing the drum cartridge after the message is
displayed on the touch screen, the machine will stop after copying or printing the
number of pages as follows.
z
Color 550 Printer: Approximately 6,000 pages
Maintenance
CAUTION
z When replacing drum cartridges and toner cartridges, be careful not to spill the
3 z If toner spills onto your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water.
water.
z Keep drum cartridges and toner cartridges out of the reach of children. If a child
Important The use of drum cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade image quality and
performance. Use only drum cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox.
When pulling out a unit containing drum cartridges, make sure to cover the upper portion of
the drum cartridges with the supplied black sheet within 2 minutes. Exposing drum
cartridges to light may degrade image quality.
Note Do not expose drum cartridges to direct sunlight or strong light from indoor fluorescent
lighting. Do not touch or scratch the surface of the drum. Doing so may result in
unsatisfactory printing.
The remaining page yield is applicable when A4 paper LEF ( ) is used. The value is an
estimate and varies depending on the conditions such as the paper size, the paper
orientation, the number of pages continuously printed, and the machine operating
environment.
Keep the power of the machine on when replacing drum cartridges. If the power is turned off,
the information saved in the memory of the machine will be lost.
When the machine is in the Energy Saver mode, press the <Energy Saver> button before
replacing a drum cartridge and deactivate the Energy Saver mode.
When replacing drum cartridges, even if the control panel is lit, make sure to press the
<Machine Status> button for accurate information on the drum cartridge status.
Images output from the machine may get dirty after the message "Please order a Drum
Cartridge R1" appears on the touch screen.
58
1 Remove the new drum cartridge and the

supplied black sheet from the box
beforehand.
Important Place the new drum cartridge on a level
surface.
Do not place the new drum cartridge in an
upright position.

Maintenance
3 Pull down lever R1-R4 towards you. 3
4 Hold the handle of the unit and pull it out.
CAUTION
Be sure to pull out the unit slowly. If pulled
out with too much force, it may hit and
injure your knees or other parts of your
body.
5 Cover the upper surface of the unit other

than drum cartridge R1 using the supplied
black sheet removed from the box earlier.
Important When replacing a drum cartridge, be sure
to cover the unit with the black sheet.
Leaving it uncovered may degrade the
image quality.
59
3 Maintenance
6 Hold the rings provided at both ends of the

drum cartridge, and lift the cartridge out from
the machine.
CAUTION
Be sure to insert your fingers into

the rings when lifting up the drum
cartridge.
7 Insert the used drum cartridge into the box which contained the new drum cartridge.
Maintenance
8 Remove the new drum cartridge from the

plastic bag.
Important When removing the drum cartridge from
the plastic bag, be careful not to touch or
scratch the surface of the drum.
3
9 Open the protective cover so it unfolds

underneath the drum cartridge.
10 Lift the drum cartridge, holding the rings

provided at both ends of the cartridge.
CAUTION

cartridge.
11 Aligning it with the guides, place the drum

cartridge into the unit with the ( ) side
facing you.
60
12 Push down on the drum cartridge at both

ends so that it is level.
Note Make sure that the ( ) and ( ) marks
are aligned.
13 Remove the black sheet covering the top of the unit.

14 Push the unit in completely (1), and return
the lever of the unit to its original position (2).
Maintenance
2
3
15 Lift up lever R1-R4 to close.

remain paused.
61
3 Maintenance
Replacing Drum Cartridges R2, R3, or R4 (For Customers Having a Time

and Material Contract)
The machine displays the message "Please order a Drum Cartridge RX" when a drum
cartridge needs to be replaced. When the message is displayed, contact your local Fuji
For customers having a Time and Material Contract, refer to this section and locate the
position or the indicated drum cartridge (R2, R3, or R4), and replace the drum cartridge.
If you continue to copy without replacing the drum cartridge after the message is
displayed on the touch screen, the machine will stop after copying the number of pages
as follows.
z
Maintenance
CAUTION
z When replacing drum cartridges and toner cartridges, be careful not to spill the
3 z If toner spills onto your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water.
water.
z Keep drum cartridges and toner cartridges out of the reach of children. If a child
Important The use of drum cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade image quality and
performance. Use only drum cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox.
When pulling out a unit containing drum cartridges, make sure to cover the upper portion of
the drum cartridges with the supplied black sheet within 2 minutes. Exposing drum
cartridges to light may degrade image quality.
Note Do not expose drum cartridges to direct sunlight or strong light from indoor fluorescent
lighting. Do not touch or scratch the surface of the drum. Doing so may result in
unsatisfactory printing.
The remaining page yield is applicable when A4 paper LEF ( ) is used. The value is an
estimate and varies depending on the conditions such as the paper size, the paper
orientation, the number of pages continuously printed, and the machine operating
environment.
Keep the power of the machine on when replacing drum cartridges. If the power is turned off,
the information saved in the memory of the machine will be lost.
replacing a drum cartridge and deactivate the Energy Saver mode.
When replacing drum cartridges, even if the control panel is lit, make sure to press the
<Machine Status> button for accurate information on the drum cartridge status.
Images output from the machine may get dirty after the message "Please order a Drum
Cartridge RX" appears on the touch screen.
62
1 Remove the new drum cartridge and the

supplied black sheet from the box
beforehand.
Important Place the new drum cartridge on a level
surface.
Do not place the new drum cartridge in an
upright position.

Maintenance
3 Pull down lever R1-R4 towards you. 3
4 Hold the handle of the unit and pull it out.
CAUTION
Be sure to pull out the unit slowly. If pulled
out with too much force, it may hit and
injure your knees or other parts of your
body.
5 Hold the rings provided at both ends of the

drum cartridge, and lift the cartridge out from
the machine.
Note This section explains how to replace drum
cartridge R2, as an example.
CAUTION

cartridge.
6 Place the used drum cartridge into the box which contained the new drum cartridge.
63
3 Maintenance
7 Using the supplied black sheet removed

from the box earlier, cover the upper surface
of the unit pulled out.
Important When replacing a drum cartridge, be sure
to cover the unit with the black sheet.
Leaving it uncovered may degrade the
image quality.
8 Remove the new drum cartridge from the

plastic bag.
Important When removing the drum cartridge from
the plastic bag, be careful not to touch or
Maintenance
scratch the surface of the drum.
3 9 Open the protective cover so it unfolds

underneath the drum cartridge.
10 Remove the black sheet covering the top of the unit.

11 Lift the drum cartridge holding the rings
provided at both ends.
CAUTION

cartridge.
Important Do not touch the surface of the drum.
12 Aligning it with the guides, place the drum

cartridge into the unit with the ( ) side
facing you.
64
13 Push down on the drum cartridge at both

ends so that it is level.
Note Make sure that the ( ) and ( ) marks
are aligned.
14 Peel off the film sheet attached to the upper

surface of the drum cartridge.
Maintenance
15 Push the unit in completely (1), and return 3
the lever of the unit to its original position (2).
2
16 Lift up lever R1-R4 to close.

remain paused.
65
3 Maintenance
Replacing the Staple Cartridge (For Finisher C2 or Finisher C2 with

Booklet Maker)
When the Finisher C2 (optional) or Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker (optional) is
installed and it is time to replace the staple cartridge, a message appears on the touch
screen. When this message appears, replace the staple cartridge.
The following example shows how to replace the staple cartridge in the Finisher C2 with
Booklet Maker. The procedure for the Finisher C2 is the same.
Important The use of staples not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade image quality and
performance. Use only staples recommended by Fuji Xerox.
Note If the staple cartridge is not replaced properly, the message prompting replacement will
remain displayed. In this case, set the new staple cartridge again by performing the following
procedure one more time from the beginning.
Maintenance
To order a staple cartridge, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.

and open the front cover of the finisher.
2 Grip lever R1 of the staple cartridge holder,

and pull out the holder to the right towards
you.
Lever (R1)
3 Remove the staple cartridge holder by

gripping the orange lever.
Note The staple cartridge is firmly set in place.
Removing the cartridge may require
pulling on the cartridge with slight force.
Orange lever
4 Grasp the empty staple case with your

2
fingers (1), and then remove the case from
the cartridge (2) as shown in the figure. 1
66
5 Prepare a new staple case. Insert the front of

2
the staple case into the staple cartridge (1),
and push down the rear of the case (2).
6 Insert the staple cartridge while gripping the

orange lever until you hear it click into place.
Maintenance
Orange lever
7 Close the front cover of the finisher.

Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover of the finisher
3
is even slightly open.
Replacing the Booklet Staple Cartridge (For Finisher C2 with Booklet

Maker)
When the Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed and it is time to replace
the booklet staple cartridge, a message appears on the touch screen. When this
message appears, replace the booklet staple cartridge.
Important The use of staple cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade image quality
and performance. Use only staple cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox.
Note If the booklet staple cartridge is not replaced properly, the message prompting replacement
will remain displayed. In this case, set the new booklet staple cartridge again by performing
the following procedure one more time from the beginning.

67
3 Maintenance
2 While pressing the lever for R2 R3 to the

right (1), pull the staple cartridge unit out of
R3
the machine (2).
R2
3 Hold the staple cartridge by the tabs on both

sides and lift the cartridge out of the unit.
Maintenance
3 4 While holding the tabs of the new staple

cartridge, push the cartridge into the unit.
Lightly push the cartridge down until you
5 Push the staple cartridge unit into its original

position.

68
Replacing the Staple Cartridge (For Finisher D4 or Finisher D4 with

Booklet Maker)
When the Finisher D4 (optional) or Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker (optional) is
installed and it is time to replace the staple cartridge, a message appears on the touch
screen. When this message appears, replace the staple cartridge.
For remedies if the staple cartridge happened to come off the holder during replacement work, refer to
"Re-inserting the Staple Cartridge into the Cartridge Unit" (P.267).
Important The use of staples not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade quality and performance.
Use only staples recommended by Fuji Xerox.
Note If the staple cartridge is not replaced properly, the message prompting replacement will
remain displayed. In this case, set the new staple cartridge again by performing the following
procedure one more time from the beginning.
Maintenance
and open the right cover of the finisher.
2 Hold unit R1 located at the position shown in

the illustration.
3 Pull out the unit.
4 Hold the position indicated by the arrow to

remove the staple cartridge from the unit.
69
3 Maintenance
5 Push a new staple cartridge into the unit.
6 Push the removed unit back to its original

position.
Maintenance
7 Close the right cover of the finisher.

3 Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the right cover of the finisher
Replacing the Booklet Staple Cartridge (For Finisher D4 with Booklet

Maker)
When the Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed and the booklet staple
cartridge needs to be replaced, a message appears on the touch screen. When this
message appears, replace the booklet staple cartridge.
Important The use of staple cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may impair quality and
performance. Use only staple cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox for the machine.
Note If the booklet staple cartridge is not replaced properly, the message prompting replacement
will remain displayed. In this case, set the new booklet staple cartridge again by performing
the following procedure one more time from the beginning.

70
2 While pushing the lever for R2 R3 to the right

(1), pull the staple cartridge unit out of the
machine (2).
3 Hold the staple cartridge by the tabs on both

sides and lift the cartridge out of the unit.
Maintenance
4 While holding the tabs of the new staple 3
cartridge, push the cartridge into the unit.
Lightly push the cartridge down until you
5 Push the staple cartridge unit into its original

position.

Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the right cover of the finisher
71
3 Maintenance
Emptying the Punch Waste Container (For Finisher C2 or Finisher C2 with

Booklet Maker)
When the Finisher C2 (optional) or Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker (optional) is
installed and the punch waste container becomes full, a message appears on the touch
screen. Discard the waste according to the message.
If you take the punch waste container out of the machine, make sure to empty it
completely. If it is reinstalled with some waste remaining, it may become full before the
message appears again, and this can cause machine breakdown.
Important When emptying the punch waste container, make sure that the machine is switched on. If
not switched on, the machine will not recognize that the punch waste container has been
emptied.
emptying the punch waste container and deactivate the Energy Saver mode.
Maintenance
When emptying the punch waste container, even if the control panel is lit, make sure to
press the <Machine Status> button for accurate information on the punch waste container
status.

3
2 Pull out punch waste container R4 towards

you.
3 Discard all waste.
72
4 Insert the empty punch waste container until

it comes to a stop.

Maintenance
Emptying the Punch Waste Container (For Finisher D4 or Finisher D4 with
Booklet Maker)
When the Finisher D4 (optional) or Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker (optional) is
installed and the punch waste container becomes full, a message appears on the touch 3
screen. Discard the waste according to the message.
If you take the punch waste container out of the machine, make sure to empty it
completely. If it is reinstalled with some waste remaining, it may become full before the
message appears again, and this can cause machine breakdown.
Important When emptying the punch waste container, make sure that the machine is switched on. If
not switched on, the machine will not recognize that the punch waste container has been
emptied.
emptying the punch waste container and deactivate the Energy Saver mode.
When emptying the punch waste container, even if the control panel is lit, make sure to
press the <Machine Status> button for accurate information on the punch waste container
status.

2 Pull out the punch waste container R4

towards you.
73
3 Maintenance
3 Discard all waste.
4 Insert the empty punch waste container all

the way into the machine.
Maintenance

3 Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the right cover of the finisher
is not closed properly.
Emptying the Staple Waste Container (For Finisher D4 or Finisher D4 with

Booklet Maker)
When the staple waste container becomes full, a message appears on the touch
screen. Replace the staple waste container according to the message.
CAUTION
Be careful not to get injured by waste staples when detaching the staple waste
container.
Important Replace the staple waste container while the power is on.
A staple waste container is included in a Staple Cartridge for 100 sheets XF.

74
2 Move the lock lever, shown in the illustration,

left-ward to the position.
3 Hold R5 as shown in the illustration and

remove the staple waste container from the
machine.
Maintenance
4 Put the used staple waste container into the 3
supplied plastic bag.
Important Do not disassemble the container and
return it to your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
5 Hold the new staple waste container by R5

and push it into the machine.
Important To prevent injury, do not put your fingers
on top of the container.
6 Push R5 until the lock lever moves to the

position.

75
3 Maintenance
Cleaning the Machine
This section describes how to clean the machine such as the machine exterior,
document cover, document feeder, and document glass.
WARNING
When cleaning this product, use the designated cleaning materials exclusive to it.
Other cleaning materials may result in poor performance of the product. Never use
aerosol cleaners, or it may catch fire and cause explosion.
CAUTION
When cleaning this product, always switch off the power and then the main power
Maintenance
inside the body front cover, and unplug the product. Access to a live machine interior
may cause electric shock.
Cleaning the Exterior

3
CAUTION
When cleaning this product, always switch off the power and then the main power
inside the body front cover, and unplug the product. Access to a live machine interior
may cause electric shock.
The following describes how to clean the exterior of the machine.

Important Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other volatile liquids or spray insect repellent on the
machine as they might discolor, deform, or crack covers.
Cleaning the machine with an excessive amount of water may cause the machine to
malfunction or damage documents during copying.
1 Wipe the exterior with a firmly wrung soft

cloth moistened with water.
Important Do not use cleaning agents other than
water or neutral detergent.
Note If you cannot remove the dirt easily,
gently wipe the machine with a soft cloth
moistened with a small amount of neutral
detergent.
2 Wipe off any excess water with a soft cloth.
76
Cleaning the Machine
Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass

If the document cover and document glass become soiled, smudges may appear on
copies or scanned documents and the machine may not properly detect document
sizes.
To ensure clean copies at all times, clean the document cover and the document glass
about once a month.
Important Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other organic solvents. Doing so might damage paint
or coating on plastic parts.
malfunction or damage documents during copying or scanning.
1 Wipe the document cover with a soft cloth

moistened with water to remove any dirt, and
Maintenance
then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
Document cover Document glass
Note If you cannot remove dirt easily, gently
wipe the document cover with a soft cloth
detergent. 3
2 Wipe the document glass with a soft cloth moistened with water to remove any dirt,
and then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
Important Do not use cleaning agents other than water or neutral detergent.
Note If you cannot remove dirt easily, gently wipe the document glass with a soft cloth moistened
with a small amount of neutral detergent.
Cleaning the Document Presser and Narrow Glass Strip

If the document presser or narrow glass strip are dirty, streaks or smears may appear
on copies or scanned documents and the machine may not properly detect document
sizes.
To ensure clean copies and scans at all times, clean the document presser and narrow
glass strip about once a month.
malfunction or damage documents during copying or scanning.
1 Wipe the document presser, narrow glass

strip, and guide with a soft cloth moistened
with water to remove any dirt, and then wipe Document
presser
them with a soft, dry cloth.
Important Do not use cleaning agents other than Narrow
water or neutral detergent. glass
strip
wipe the film with a soft cloth moistened Guide
with a small amount of neutral detergent.
77
3 Maintenance
2 Hold the green lever to open the part of the Lever

illustration on the right. Wipe the narrow
glass strip with a soft cloth moistened with
water to remove any dirt on the optical glass,
and then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
Important Do not press the narrow glass strip with
excessive force as it is easy to damage Narrow
the film around the optical glass surface. glass
strip
Do not use cleaning agents other than
Note If you cannot remove dirt easily, gently wipe the glass with a soft cloth moistened with a
small amount of neutral detergent.
3 Close the cover until it clicks into place by pushing the center part of the left edge of
Maintenance
the cover.
Cleaning the Document Feeder Rollers

3 If the document feeder rollers become soiled, smudges may appear on copies or
scanned documents and paper jams may occur.
To ensure clean copies at all times, clean the document feeder rollers about once a
month.
malfunction or damage documents during copying scanning, or printing.
1 Lift the latch of the document feeder top,

until it is completely open.
Note When you fully open the cover, it enters a
fixed position. Open the cover gently.
2 While turning the rollers, wipe them with a

soft cloth moistened with water.
Use a cloth firmly wrung to prevent water
drops from falling into the machine. If
water gets into the machine, it may cause
the machine to malfunction.
wipe the rollers with a soft cloth
detergent.
3 Close the top cover of the document feeder until it clicks into place.
4 Close the left cover of the document feeder until it clicks into place.
78
Executing Calibration
The machine can automatically calibrate colors when the reproducibility of density or
color in copies and prints deteriorates. The available screen types are [Copy Job 1],
[Copy Job 2], [Print Job 1], and [Print Job 2].
We recommend executing auto calibration for all four screen types. When the
adjustment for one screen type is complete, specify the next screen type and repeat
the procedure.
Note If color is not calibrated despite the periodic execution of auto calibration, contact your local
Fuji Xerox representative.
Confirm the settings of the following items under [Tools] > [System Settings] > [Copy Service
Settings] > [Copy Defaults] in the System Administration mode before executing auto
calibration:
Maintenance
- Lighten/Darken: Normal
- Contrast: Normal
- Sharpness: Normal
- Saturation: Normal
- Color Balance: 0, 0, 0
- Color Shift: Normal
After finishing the auto calibration, change the settings of [Copy Defaults] if necessary. For
3
information on [Copy Defaults], refer to "Copy Defaults" (P.134).
The following describes how to perform calibration.
1 Select [Calibration] on the [Services Home]

screen.
If [Calibration] is not displayed, follow the
procedure below.
1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.
<Log In/Out> button
2) Enter the system administrators user ID

with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select
[Enter].
79
3 Maintenance
3) Select [Tools] on the [Services Home]

screen.
4) Select [System Settings] > [Common

Service Settings] > [Image Quality
Adjustment].
Maintenance
2 Select [Calibration].
3 Select [Screen Type] and [Paper Supply].

Note The following describes calibration
procedures using Copy Job 1, as an
example.
For Paper Supply, select the paper tray
on which A4 , A3 , 8.5 x 11" , or
11 x 17" white paper is loaded.
Make sure that [Target] is set to [Copy &
Print Jobs].
If [Copy & Print Jobs] is not selected for [Target], calibration is not valid for the mode that
does not correspond to [Target].
4 Select [Start].
Note The message "Outputting the Calibration
Chart... - Copy Job 1" appears and the
document for calibration (Calibration
Chart) is printed.
5 Align the magenta patch (squares printed at

Magenta
the top and bottom of the Calibration Chart)
of the printed Calibration Chart against the
left side of the document glass, and load the
chart facing down on the document glass.
Note Place the Calibration Chart on the
document glass.
80
6 Place at least five sheets of white paper on

the Calibration Chart to cover the Chart and
close the document cover.
7 Select [Start].
The message Calibration in progress. - Copy Job 1 appears and the machine
automatically calibrates the colors. It takes about 30 seconds to complete calibration.
Maintenance
A screen showing the result appears.
8 Select [Confirm].
9 To continue calibration for other screen types, repeat steps 3 to 8.
10 Select [Close].
3
11 Copy or print to confirm the image quality.
Note During auto calibration, the machine cannot receive print jobs.
81
3 Maintenance
Printing a Report/List
You can print a report/list to check the settings and communication status.
This section describes how to print a report/ list.
For information on the types of report/list, refer to "Print Reports" (P.87).
1 Press the <Machine Status> button.

Maintenance
<Machine Status> button
2 Select [Print Reports].

3 Note If [Print Reports Button] is set to
[Disabled] under [Reports], [Print Reports]
appears only in the System
Administration mode. For information on
[Reports], refer to "Reports" (P.119).
3 Select the service that you want a report or

list for.
Note [Printer Reports], [Scan Reports], and
[Folder List] cannot be used on this
machine.
4 Select a report or list to print, and then press the <Start> button.
82
4 Machine Status
This chapter describes the features for checking the machine status.
z Overview of Machine Status .......................................................................84
z
Machine Information ................................................................................... 85
z
Faults .......................................................................................................... 92
z Supplies ......................................................................................................93
z
Billing Information .......................................................................................94
4 Machine Status
Overview of Machine Status
You can check machine status and the number of printed pages on the screen. You
can also print various reports/lists to check the job history, settings and registered
information.

Machine Status
<Machine Status> button
You can check the following information on the [Machine Status] screen:
Machine Information
4 You can check the machine configuration, paper tray status, and hard disk overwriting
status. You can also check the number of pages printed per meter or per user. You also
can print various reports/lists to check the job history, settings and registered
information.
For more information, refer to "Machine Information" (P.85).
Faults
You can check the information on errors that occurred on the machine.
For more information, refer to "Faults" (P.92).
Supplies
You can check the status of consumables.
For more information, refer to "Supplies" (P.93).
Billing Information
You can check the number of pages printed by meter (meters 1 to 4).
For more information, refer to "Billing Information" (P.94).
84
Machine Information
Machine Information
On the [Machine Information] screen, you can check the machine configuration and
paper tray status, and print various reports/lists.
The following shows the reference section for each item.
General Information ................................................................................................................... 85
Paper Tray Status ....................................................................................................................... 87
Print Reports............................................................................................................................... 87
Overwrite Hard Disk .................................................................................................................. 91

2 On the [Machine Information] screen
Machine Status
displayed, you can check the machine
status.
4
General Information
On the [General Information] screen, you can check the serial number of the machine,
machine configuration, and software version.
1 Check the general information.
Website
Tells you whom to contact when making inquiries about maintenance and operation.
Machine Serial Number

Indicates the serial number of the machine.
Current System Software

Indicates the current system software.
IP Address
Indicates the IP address of the machine.
Machine Configuration
Displays the [Machine Configuration] screen.
For more information, refer to "[Machine Configuration] Screen" (P.86).
Software Version
Displays the [Software Version] screen.
For more information, refer to "[Software Version] Screen" (P.86).
85
4 Machine Status
[Machine Configuration] Screen

You can check the machine configuration.
1 Select [Machine Configuration].

2 Check the machine configuration on the
screen displayed.
On the [Machine Configuration] screen, you can check the following items:
Machine Status
Note The items displayed vary depending on the optional features installed.
z Configuration Code z Duplex Module z HP-GL/2 *1

z Document Feeder z Hard Disk z ESC/P *1
z Paper Tray z Page Memory Size z TIFF/JPEG *1
z High Capacity Feeder z System Memory Size z PDF *1
4 z Tray 8 (Inserter) z System Memory Size z XPS *1, *2
z Offset Stacking Module z PCL 6/5e *1 z DocuWorks *1
z Output Device z KS *1 z USB *1
z Folder z KSSM *1 z Network Controller
*1
z Booklet Maker z KS5895
*1 This feature cannot be used on this machine.

*2 XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
[Software Version] Screen

You can check the software version.
1 Select [Software Version].

2 Check the software versions.
On the [Software Version] screen, you can check the following items:
z Controller ROM z IFM ROM

z IOT ROM z IIT ROM
z HCF ROM z ADF ROM
z Finisher D ROM z SJFI
z Finisher C ROM z SSMI
86
Machine Information
Paper Tray Status

You can check the paper trays set on the machine. On the screen, you can check the
following items:
z
Status
z % Full (Amount of paper remaining)
z
Paper Size
z
Paper Type
1 Select [Paper Tray Status].

2 Check the status of the paper trays.
Machine Status
Print Reports
The following describes how to print a report and a list.
4
[Printer Reports], [Scan Reports], and [Folder List] cannot be used on this machine.
1 Select [Print Reports].

2 Select the type of a report or a list to print.
Note The screen as shown on the right
appears when the [Tools] button is
displayed on the [Services Home] screen.
Job Status
1 Select [Job Status].

Note To display the [Job Status] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then select
[Machine Information] > [Print Reports] > [Job Status].
2 Select a report or a list to print.
3 Press the <Start> button.
87
4 Machine Status
Job History Report

This report displays and prints the job results and related information about the latest
200 jobs. Select a report to print from [All Jobs], [Printer & Print from Folder Jobs], or
[Scan, Fax, & Internet Fax Jobs].
Selecting [Include Child Jobs] check box prints each related job on each line.
Deselecting this check box prints the multiple related jobs on one line.
You can also set up the machine to automatically print a [Job History Report] every 50
jobs.
For information on the auto print of a job history report, refer to "Reports" (P.119). When you set the
machine to print a job history report automatically, the machine prints the results of all jobs.
Error History Report

You can print information on errors occurred in the machine. The latest 50 errors are
printed.
Machine Status
Copy Reports
1 Select [Copy Reports].

Note To display the [Copy Reports] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then select
[Machine Information] > [Print Reports] > [Copy Reports].
4 2 Select [Configuration Report].
Configuration Report
You can check the hardware configuration, network information, and copy settings of
the machine.
Network Controller Job Report

Note This option may not be selectable depending on the print server installed.
1 Select [Network Controller Jobs Report].

2 Select the report/list to be printed.
Note The items displayed vary depending on
the optional features installed.
Job History Report

You can check the job results of the Network Controller.
88
Machine Information
Error History Report

You can print error information about the Network Controller.
Font List
This prints a list of the fonts available for PostScript.
Configuration Report
You can check the network information, and print and scan settings of the Network
Controller.
Job Counter Report

Prints the counter report for each job. You can check the breakdown of the number of
actual use of the machine by feature (such as the number of pages printed and the
number of times used) and cumulative time when the machine is used (such as
Machine Status
runtime, standby time, Low Power mode, Sleep mode, and power-off time) by minutes
on the Job Counter Report.
Note [Job Counter Report] appears when the [Tools] button is displayed on the [Services Home]
screen.
1 Select [Job Counter Report].

Note To display the [Job Counter Report] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then
select [Machine Information] > [Print Reports] > [Job Counter Report]. 4
2 Select [Job Counter Report].
Auditron Reports
You can print an auditron report by each user. Note that the content on the screen
differs depending on whether the Auditron mode for services is enabled or not.
Note [Auditron Reports] appears when the [Tools] button is displayed on the [Services Home]
screen.
When [Accounting Type] is set to other than [Local Accounting]

When [Accounting Type] of each service is set to other than [Local Accounting], the
following screen appears, allowing you to print a Meter Report (Print Jobs).
1 Select [Auditron Reports].

Note To display the [Auditron Reports] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then
select [Machine Information] > [Print Reports] > [Auditron Reports].
2 Select [Meter Report (Print Jobs)].
89
4 Machine Status
Meter Report (Print Jobs)

You can check the total number of printed pages and sheets of paper used for each
client (job owner). [Meter Report (Print Jobs)] counts pages from the time at which the
data is initialized.
When [Accounting Type] is set to [Local Accounting]

When [Accounting Type] is set to [Local Accounting], the [Auditron Reports] screen
appears. You can print the auditron report per user for the services of which the
Auditron mode is set to [Enable Accounting].
For information on enabling the Auditron feature for each service, refer to "Accounting" (P.152).
1 Select [Auditron Reports].

Machine Status
Note To display the [Auditron Reports] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then
select [Machine Information] > [Print Reports] > [Auditron Reports].
2 Select an auditron report to print.
4
3 Select a range of user numbers to print.
Note Selecting [Select All] selects all users.
Auditron Report (Copy Jobs)

You can check the total number of pages copied on the machine. If the limit is set for
the number of pages or colors that can be copied, you can also check the limit value.
[Auditron Report (Copy Jobs)] counts pages from the time at which the data is
initialized.
Note [No.] displayed on the report is the User Administration Number assigned when a user is
registered under [Accounting] or [Authentication/Security Settings].
Auditron Report (Print Jobs)

You can check the total number of printed pages and sheets of paper used for each
client (job owner). [Auditron Report (Print Jobs)] counts pages from the time at which
the data is initialized.
Important When [Print Service] is set to [Disable Accounting] in [Auditron Mode] under [Accounting
Type], [Meter Report (Print Jobs)] is displayed instead of [Auditron Report (Print Jobs)]. For
more information on Meter Report (Print Jobs), refer to "Meter Report (Print Jobs)" (P.90).
Auditron Report (Scan Jobs)

You can check the total number of pages scanned with the machine. If the limit is set
for the number of pages that can be scanned, you can also check the limit value.
[Auditron Report (Scan Jobs)] counts pages from the time at which the data is
initialized.
90
Machine Information
Overwrite Hard Disk

You can check the overwriting status of the hard disk. "Overwriting" indicates that the
overwriting is in progress. "Standby" indicates that the overwriting is completed.
Note This feature does not appear for some models. For more information, contact your local Fuji
[Overwrite Hard Disk] appears when [Overwrite Hard Disk] is enabled under [Authentication/Security
Settings]. For more information, refer to "Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.164).
1 Select [Overwrite Hard Disk].

2 Check the overwriting status of the hard disk.
Machine Status
4
91
4 Machine Status
Faults
This section describes how to check the information on errors that occurred on the
machine.
The error history report shows the list of the latest 50 errors. The items printed include
the date and time, error code, and error category.
The following describes how to print the error history report.

2 Select the [Faults] tab.
3 Select [Error History Report].
Machine Status
Note You can also access [Error History Report] under [Machine Information] > [Print Reports] >
[Job Status].
4 If [Print Reports Button] under [Reports] is set to [Disabled], the [Error History Report] button
does not appear on the screen. For more information on Reports, refer to "Reports" (P.119).
92
Supplies
Supplies
You can check the status of consumables on the [Supplies] screen. The status of
consumables is shown as "OK", "Replace Soon", or "Replace Now".
The following describes the procedure to check the status of consumables.
For information on replacing consumables, refer to "Maintenance" (P.51).

2 Select the [Supplies] tab and confirm the
status of the toners.
Note Pressing a supply name displays a
screen about the status of the supply.
Machine Status
3 Select [Toner] from the drop-down list box,
and then select [Other Consumables] and
confirm the status of the consumables.
4
On the [Supplies] screen, you can check the following items:

z
Black Toner [K1] z
Drum Cartridge [R3]
z
Black Toner [K2] z
Drum Cartridge [R4]
z
Cyan Toner [C] z
Waste Toner Container
z
Magenta Toner [M] z
Staple Cartridge [R1]
z
Yellow Toner [Y] z
Booklet Staple Cartridge [R2]
z
Drum Cartridge [R1] z
Booklet Staple Cartridge [R3]
z
Drum Cartridge [R2] z
Hole Punch Waste Container [R4]
Important If you replace a toner cartridge with a partially used toner cartridge (such as a toner cartridge
removed from another Color 550/560 Printer), the status displayed may differ from the actual
remaining amount. When replacing toner cartridges, we recommend that you use new ones.
Note Staple Cartridge: Displays when Finisher C2, Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker, or Finisher D4
with Booklet Maker is installed.
Hole Punch Waste Container: Displays when Finisher C2, Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker,
or Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker is installed.
Booklet Staple Cartridge: Displays when Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker is installed.
93
4 Machine Status
Billing Information
On the [Billing Information] screen, you can check the number of pages printed per
meter or user.
The following shows the reference section for each item:
Billing Information .....................................................................................................................94
User Account Billing Information ..............................................................................................95

2 Select the [Billing Information] tab.
Machine Status
Billing Information
4 You can check the total number of copies and pages printed by individual meters.
1 Select [Billing Information].

2 On the screen, check each meter.
Serial Number
Displays the serial number of the machine.
Color Impressions
Displays the total number of pages copied or printed in full color.
Black Impressions
Displays the total number of pages copied or printed in black and white.
Color Large Impressions

Displays the total number of pages copied or printed in large-size (sheet size larger
than 297 x 400 mm) full color.
Black Large Impressions

Displays the total number of pages copied or printed in large-size (sheet size larger
than 297 x 400 mm) black and white.
Total Impressions
Displays the total number of Color Impressions and Black Impressions.
94
Billing Information
User Account Billing Information

You can check the number of pages printed by user.
When the Auditron mode is enabled, you can check the billing meters for the currently
authenticated user ID.
Note [User Account Billing Information] is displayed when the [Accounting Type] is set to [Local
Accounting].
For more information on the Auditron mode, refer to "Accounting" (P.152).
To check the billing meter of a currently authenticated user ID

1) Enter the user ID with the numeric keypad
or the keyboard displayed on the screen,
and select [Enter].
Machine Status
When a password is required, select
[Next] and enter the users passcode, and
select [Enter].
2) Press the <Machine Status> button.
To check the system administrator meter

1) Enter the system administrators user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
4
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrators
2) Press the <Machine Status> button.

2 Select the [Billing Information] tab.
3 Select [User Account Billing Information].
4 Select a meter to check.

Note The meters are displayed only for the
features set to [Enable Accounting] in the
Auditron mode.
Meter (Copy Jobs)

Displays the number of pages copied.
Meter (Scan Jobs)

Displays the number of pages scanned.
Meter (Print Jobs)

Displays the number of pages printed.
Note [Meter (Print Jobs)] is not displayed for the system administrator.
95
Machine Status 4 Machine Status
96
5 Tools
Each feature of the machine is set to the factory default (initial) settings, but you
can customize these settings in accordance with your environment. To change
or customize these settings, enter the System Administration mode and make
changes in the [Tools] screen.
This chapter describes the features that can be changed and the procedures to
change the settings.
z
System Settings Procedure ........................................................................ 98
z Tools Menu List ........................................................................................ 101
z
Common Service Settings ........................................................................ 108
z
Copy Service Settings ..............................................................................133
z Connectivity & Network Setup .................................................................. 142
z
Print Service Settings ............................................................................... 142
z
Scan Service Settings............................................................................... 143
z Email Service Settings ..............................................................................148
z
Folder Service Settings............................................................................. 148
z Job Flow Service Settings ........................................................................ 148
z
Stored File Settings .................................................................................. 148
z
Network Controller Settings ...................................................................... 149
z Setup ........................................................................................................ 151
z
Accounting ................................................................................................152
z
Authentication/Security Settings ...............................................................158
5 Tools
System Settings Procedure
To change or customize the system settings, enter the System Administration mode.
This section describes the basic procedures for system settings.
Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode ...........................................................................98
Step 2 Entering the System Administrator User ID and Passcode .............................................98
Step 3 Selecting [Tools]..............................................................................................................99
Step 4 Selecting a Setting Item on the [Tools] Screen................................................................99
Step 5 Setting a Feature ............................................................................................................100
Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode ...........................................................................100
Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode
1 Press the <Log In/Out> button or the login

information field on the touch screen.
Tools
5
<Log In/Out> button
Step 2 Entering the System Administrator User ID and Passcode

To enter the System Administration mode, enter the system administrator User ID. If
[Passcode Entry from Control Panel] is set to [On] under [Authentication/Security
Settings] > [Authentication] > [Passcode Policy], you need to enter the passcode.
We recommend that you change the system administrator user ID and passcode
immediately after installing the machine.
For more information on how to change the passcode, refer to "System Administrator Settings" (P.158).

passcode, and then select [Enter].
The screen may differ depending on the settings of the machine.
The <Log In/Out> button is lit when the machine enters the System Administration mode.
98
System Settings Procedure
Step 3 Selecting [Tools]

screen.
Step 4 Selecting a Setting Item on the [Tools] Screen

On the [Tools] screen, select a setting item to set.
For the items that can be selected on the [Tools] screen, refer to "Tools Menu List" (P.101).
1 Select a tab to set.
Tools
5
System Settings
You can set or change the default values of each service.
Common Service Settings

Allows you to configure the general settings of the machine.
For more information, refer to "Common Service Settings" (P.108).
Copy Service Settings

Allows you to configure the copy service settings such as copy feature defaults, copy
operation control, and button indications.
For more information, refer to "Copy Service Settings" (P.133).
Scan Service Settings

Allows you to configure the scan service settings such as scanner defaults and button
indications.
For more information, refer to "Scan Service Settings" (P.143).
Setup
You can register stored programs and set paper tray attributes.
For more information, refer to "Setup" (P.151).
Accounting
You can register users and configure the settings for account administration.
For more information, refer to "Accounting" (P.152).
99
5 Tools
Authentication/Security Settings
You can configure the authentication and security settings.
For more information, refer to "Authentication/Security Settings" (P.158).
Step 5 Setting a Feature
1 Select any feature.

Note Select a submenu from the [Group] list, and then select a feature from the [Features] list.
Select [ ] or [ ] as required.
2 Select an item to set.

3 After setting the feature, select [Save].
4 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Services Home] screen is displayed.
Note If rebooting the machine is required to enable the new settings, when you select [Close] in
the [Tools] screen, a message may be displayed. Follow the message and reboot the
machine. After the machine reboots, it exits from the System Administration mode, and the
<Log In/Out> button is unlit.
Tools
Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode

5
Note You can also log out by pressing the login information field on the touch screen, and then
selecting [Logout].
The <Log In/Out> button is unlit when the machine exits from the System Administration
mode.
100
Tools Menu List
Tools Menu List
The following tables list the items that can be set on the [Tools] screen. Note that some
items may not appear depending on the configuration of the machine.
System Settings

Important The settings and features marked with an asterisk ("*") cannot be used on this machine.
Machine Clock/Timers (P.108) z Date (P.108)

z Time (P.108)
z NTP Time Synchronization (P.109) *
z Connection Interval (P.109) *
z Time Server Address (P.109) *
z Auto Clear (P.109)
z Auto Job Release (P.109)
z Auto Print (P.109)
z Printer Lockout (P.109)
z Energy Saver Timers (P.110)
Time Zone (P.110)
Tools
z
z
Daylight Savings (P.110)
Audio Tones (P.111) z
Control Panel Select Tone (P.111)
z
z
Control Panel Alert Tone (P.111)
Base Tone (P.111)
5
z
Machine Ready Tone (P.111)
z
Job Complete Tone 1, 2 (P.111)
z
Fault Tone (P.111)
z
Auto Clear Alert Tone (P.111)
z
Alert Tone (P.111)
z
Out of Paper Warning Tone (P.111)
z
Low Toner Alert Tone (P.111)
z
Stored Programming Tone (P.112)
z
Stored Programming Complete Tone (P.112)
Screen/Button Settings (P.112) z
Screen Default (P.112)
z
Screen After Auto Clear (P.112)
z
Auto Display of Login Screen (P.112)
z
Custom Buttons 1 to 3 (P.112)
z
Services Home (P.112) *
z
Services Home - Additional Features (P.112) *
z
Job Type on Job Status screen (P.112)
z
Default Language (P.113)
z
Screen Brightness (P.113)
z
Reconfirm E-mail Recipient (P.113) *
Paper Tray Settings (P.113) z
Custom Paper Name/Color (P.113)
z
Paper Tray Attributes (P.113)
z
Customize Paper Supply Screen (P.114)
z
Paper Tray Attributes on Setup Screen (P.114)
z
Paper Tray Attributes During Loading (P.114)
z
Paper Tray Priority (P.114)
z
Paper Type Priority (P.115)
z
Tray 5 - Paper Size Defaults (P.115)
z
Auto Tray Switching Control (P.115)
z
Image Quality (P.116)
Image Quality Adjustment (P.118) z
Image Quality (P.118)
z
Calibration (P.119)
101
5 Tools
Reports (P.119) z
Print Reports Button (P.119)
z
Job History Report (P.119)
z
Scan File Transfer Report (P.119) *
z
2 Sided Report (P.119)
z
Job Flow Error Report (P.119) *
Maintenance (P.120) z
Initialize Hard Disk (P.120) *
z Delete All Data (P.120)
z Software Options (P.120)
z Power on Self Test (P.120)
z
Alignment Adjustment (P.120)
z
Finisher Adjustment (P.121)
z
Adjust Image Transfer (P.121)
z
Delete All Certificates/Initialize Settings (P.121) *
Watermark (P.122) z
Date Format (P.122)
z
Default Watermark Effect (P.122)
z Default Watermark (P.122)
z Font Size (P.122)
z Background Pattern (P.122)
z Font Color (P.122)
z Density (P.122)
z Watermark/Background Contrast (P.122)
Tools
z
Force Watermark - Copy (P.123)
z
Force Watermark - Client Print (P.123) *
z
Force Watermark - Print Store File (P.123) *
5 Custom Watermark 1 to 3 (P.123)

z
z
Print this Sample List (P.123)
Force Annotation (P.123) z
Apply Layout Template to Copy/Prints Jobs
(P.124)
z
Delete Layout Template (P.124)
z
Create Text String (P.124)
Print Universal Unique ID (P.124) z
Print Universal Unique ID (P.124)
z
Print Position (P.124)
z
Print Position Adjustment (P.125)
z
Print Position (Side 2) (P.125)
Notify Job Completion by E-mail -
(P.125) *
Other Settings (P.125) z Offset Stacking (Right Top Tray) (P.125)
z Offset Stacking (Right Middle Tray) (P.125)
z Auto Job Promotion (P.125)
z Default Print Paper Size (P.126)
z Paper Size Settings (P.126)
z
Millimeters/Inches (P.129)
z
Keyboard Input Restriction (P.129)
z
Operation of Up/Down Buttons (P.129)
z
Display Consumables Screen (P.129)
z
Data Encryption (P.130)
z
Encryption Key for Confidential Data (P.130)
z
Service Rep. Restricted Operation (P.131)
z
Software Download (P.131)
z
Document Feeder Tray Elevation (P.131)
z
Gloss Level (P.132)
z
Estimated Job Time (P.132)
z Restrict Recipient Selection Method (P.132) *
z Restrict User to Edit Address Book (P.132) *
z Auto Validation of Speed Dial Entry (P.132) *
z Data Indicator (P.132) *
102
Tools Menu List
Copy Tab - Features Allocation (P.133) -

Preset Buttons (P.134) z Paper Supply - Button 2 - 5 (P.134)
z Reduce/Enlarge - Button 3 - 4 (P.134)
z Front Cover Tray - Button 1 - 3 (P.134)
z Back Cover Tray - Button 1 - 3 (P.134)
z Transparency Tray - Button 1 - 3 (P.134)
z Separator & Handout Tray - Button 1 - 3 (P.134)
Copy Defaults (P.134) z Paper Supply (P.134)
z Reduce/Enlarge (P.134)
z Output Color (P.135)
z Single Color (P.135)
z Dual Color - Source Color (P.135)
z Dual Color - Target Area Color (P.135)
z Dual Color - Non-target Area Color (P.135)
z Original Type (P.135)
z Original Type - Auto (Non-Black & White) (P.135)
z Original Type - Auto (Black & White) (P.135)
z Lighten/Darken (P.135)
z Contrast (P.135)
z Sharpness (P.135)
Tools
z
Saturation (P.135)
z
Background Suppression (P.136)
z
Color Balance - Yellow / Color Balance -
Magenta / Color Balance - Cyan / Color Balance
- Black (P.136)
5
z
Color Shift (P.136)
z
2 Sided Copying (P.136)
z
Mixed Size Originals (P.136)
z
Edge Erase - Top Edge (P.136)
z
Edge Erase - Bottom Edge (P.136)
z
Edge Erase - Left Edge (P.136)
z
Edge Erase - Right Edge (P.136)
z
Center Erase/Binding Edge Erase (P.137)
z
Edge Erase - 2 Sided Original - Side 2 (P.137)
z
Image Shift - Side 1 (P.137)
z
Image Shift - Side 2 (P.137)
z
Image Rotation (P.137)
z
Image Rotation - Rotation Direction (P.137)
z
Original Orientation (P.137)
z
Pages per Side (P.137)
z
Copy Output (P.137)
z
Uncollated - Default Separator Tray (P.137)
z
Output Destination (P.137)
z
Face Up/Down Option (P.137)
z
Sample Job (P.137)
z
Annotations - Stored Comment (P.137)
z
Annotations - Comment on Side 1 and Side 2
(P.138)
z
Annotations - Comment - Font Size (P.138)
z
Annotations - Comment - Font Color (P.138)
z
Date - Position on Side 1 and Side 2 (P.138)
z
Date - Font Size (P.138)
z
Page Numbers - Style (P.138)
z
Page Numbers - Position on Side 1 and Side 2
(P.138)
z
Page Numbers - Font Size (P.138)
z
Bates Stamp - Number of Digits (P.138)
103
5 Tools
z
Bates Stamp - Position on Side 1 and Side 2
(P.138)
z
Bates Stamp - Font Size (P.138)
z
Tab Margin Shift - Shift Value (P.138)
z
Booklet Creation - Default Cover Tray (P.138)
z
Covers - Default Front Cover Tray, Default Back
Cover Tray (P.139)
z Separators - Default Separator Tray (P.139)
Copy Control (P.139) z Memory Full Procedure (P.139)
z
Maximum Stored Pages (P.139)
z
Auto Paper Off (P.139)
z
Mixed Size Originals - 2 Sided Copy (P.139)
z
Fine-tune 100% (P.139)
z
ID Card Copy - Reduce/Enlarge (P.140)
z
Background Suppression (Photo & Text) (P.140)
z
Background Suppression Level (Text) (P.140)
z Photo & Text /Printed Original (P.140)
z Original Type - See-Through Paper (P.140)
z Face Up/Down - Reverse Order (P.140)
z Face Up/Down - Auto (Single Sheet) (P.140)
z Annotations - Comment Density (P.140)
z Comment Position - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top
Tools
Right, - Left Center, - Center, - Right Center, -

Bottom Left, - Bottom Center, and - Bottom Right
(P.140)
5 z
Date Position - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top
Right, - Bottom Left, - Bottom Center, and -
Bottom Right (P.141)
z
Page Number Position - Top Left, - Top Center, -
Top Right, - Bottom Left, - Bottom Center, and -
z
Bates Stamp - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top
Right, - Bottom Left, - Bottom Center, and -
z
Quantity Display (P.141)
z
Maximum Number of Sets (P.141)
Original Size Defaults (P.141) -
Reduce/Enlarge Presets (P.141) -
Custom Colors (P.142) -
Annotations - Create Comments -
(P.142)
Connectivity & Network Setup

This feature cannot be used on this machine.
Print Service Settings

104
Tools Menu List

First Tab (P.143) z Feature in 2nd Column (P.143)

z Reduce/Enlarge - Buttons 2 to 5 (P.143)
Scan Defaults (P.143) z Color Scanning (P.143)
z Original Type (P.143)
z File Format (P.144)
z Optimize PDF For Quick Web View (P.144)
z Thumbnail - Outgoing E-mail (P.144) *
z Thumbnail - Scan to PC (P.144) *
z Lighten/Darken (P.144)
z Contrast (P.144)
z Sharpness (P.144)
z Background Suppression (P.144)
z Shadow Suppression (P.144)
z Color Space (P.144)
z Original Orientation (P.144)
z Resolution (P.144)
z Mixed Size Originals (P.144)
z Edge Erase (P.144)
z Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges (P.145)
Tools
z Edge Erase - Left & Right Edges (P.145)
z Center Erase/Binding Edge Erase (P.145)
z Quality/File Size (P.145)
z
z
E-mail Subject (P.145) *
Store & Send Link - E-mail Subject (P.145) *
5
Scan to PC Defaults (P.145) * -
Original Size Defaults (P.145) -
Output Size Defaults (P.146) -
Reduce/Enlarge Presets (P.146) -
Other Settings (P.146) z Memory Full Procedure (P.146)
z Maximum Stored Pages (P.146)
z Saturation (P.146)
z Background Suppression Level (P.147)
z Shadow Suppression Level (P.147)
z Color Space (P.147)
z TIFF Format (P.147)
z Image Transfer Screen (P.147)
z URL File Expiration (P.147) *
z Generation of URL Link (P.147) *
z Store & Send Link - Maximum File Size (P.147) *
z Print Login Name on PDF Files (P.147) *
E-mail Service Settings

Folder Service Settings

Job Flow Service Settings

Stored File Settings

105
5 Tools
Network Controller Settings

Note These settings may not be selectable depending on the print server installed.
Connectivity & Network Setup (P.149) z Ethernet Rated Speed (P.149)

z TCP/IP - IP Address Resolution (P.149)
z TCP/IP - IP Address (P.149)
z TCP/IP - Subnet Mask (P.150)
z TCP/IP - Gateway Address (P.150)
z Frame Type (P.150)
Setup
Create Folder (P.151) * -

Stored Programming (P.151) -
Create Job Flow Sheet (P.151) * -
Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword (P.151) * -
Add Address Book Entry (P.151) * -
Paper Tray Attributes (P.151) -
Tools
Accounting
5 Important The settings and features marked with an asterisk ("*") cannot be used on this machine.
Create/View User Accounts (P.152) z

User ID (P.153)
z
User Name (P.153)
z
Passcode (P.153)
z
E-mail Address (P.153) *
z
Account Limit (P.153)
z
User Role (P.154)
z
Reset Account (P.154)
z
Reset Total Impressions (P.154)
Reset User Accounts (P.154) -
System Administrators Meter (Copy -
Jobs) (P.155)
Accounting Type (P.155) z Accounting Disabled (P.155)
z Local Accounting (P.155)
z Xerox Standard Accounting (P.155) *
z Auditron Mode (P.156)
Accounting Login Screen Settings z
Alternative Name for User ID (P.156)
(P.156) z
Mask User ID (***) (P.156)
Accounting/Billing Device Settings z
Connect with Accounting/Billing Device (P.156)
(P.156) z
Accounting/Billing Device (P.156)
z
Track Print Jobs (P.156)
z
Track Scan Jobs (P.157)
z
Interrupt Mode (P.157)
z
Job with Insufficient Credit (P.157)
z
Charge Print Jobs (P.157)
z
Track with Cumulative Device (P.157)
z Scan Ahead for Copy Job (P.157)
106
Tools Menu List
System Administrator Settings (P.158) z

System Administrators Login ID (P.158)
z
System Administrators Passcode (P.158)
Authentication (P.159) z
Login Type (P.159)
z Access Control (P.159)
z Create/View User Accounts (P.160)
z Reset User Accounts (P.161)
z
Create Authorization Groups (P.161)
z
User Details Setup (P.161)
z
Maximum Login Attempts by System
Administrator (P.162)
z
Passcode Policy (P.162)
z
Charge/Private Print Settings (P.162) *
Allow User to Disable Active Settings -
(P.163)
Job Status Default (P.163) z Active Jobs View (P.163)
z Completed Jobs View (P.163)
Overwrite Hard Disk (P.164) z Number of Overwrites (P.164)
Tools
5
107
5 Tools
In [Common Service Settings], you can make settings relating to the machines
common features.
The following shows the reference section for each item.
Machine Clock/Timers..............................................................................................................108
Audio Tones..............................................................................................................................111
Screen/Button Settings..............................................................................................................112
Paper Tray Settings ...................................................................................................................113
Image Quality Adjustment ........................................................................................................118
Reports ......................................................................................................................................119
Maintenance ..............................................................................................................................120
Watermark.................................................................................................................................122
Force Annotation.......................................................................................................................123
Print Universal Unique ID ........................................................................................................124
Notify Job Completion by E-mail.............................................................................................125
Other Settings............................................................................................................................125
Tools
1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings].
For information on how to display the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.98).
5
2 Select an item to set or change.
Machine Clock/Timers
You can set the machine clock or the time intervals of the machine to enter the Energy
Saver mode or to reset settings.
Date
Set the date in the system clock of the machine. The date set here will be printed on all lists
and reports.
1 Select [Date], and then select [Change Settings].

2 Select a date format.
3 Specify [Year], [Month], and [Day].
4 Select [Save].
Time
Set the time in the system clock of the machine, using 12-hour or 24-hour format.
The time set here will be printed on all lists and reports.
1 Select [Time], and then select [Change Settings].
108
2 Select the display format.

3 When you select [12 Hour Clock], set [AM] or
[PM].
4 Specify [Hours] and [Minutes].
5 Select [Save].
NTP Time Synchronization

This setting cannot be used on this machine.
Connection Interval
Time Server Address

Auto Clear
Tools
Specify the time lapsed without any operation until the machine resets the settings
automatically.
When you select [On], specify a value between 10 and 900 seconds in 1 second increments.
When you select [Off], the settings are not reset automatically. 5
Note When [Off] is selected, the machine will cancel the standby status and begin processing a
document after one minute has elapsed in anticipation of a job command.
Auto Job Release

Specify the time lapsed until the machine cancels the active job and starts the next job if an
error such as document or paper jams and running out of paper occurs during copying or
scanning. In that case, only those jobs not affected by the error can be processed.
When you select [On], specify a value in 1 minute increments. When you select [Off], the
active job is not canceled automatically.
Auto Print
Set the time period to start the next print job after the operation of the control panel (except
for the <Start> and <Clear All> buttons).
When you select [On], specify a value between 1 and 240 seconds in 1 second increments.
When you select [Off], printing starts immediately after the machine is ready.
Printer Lockout
You can set the machine to disable printing during the specified time period or to temporarily
disable printing.
Selecting [On] allows you to set [Set Lockout Duration] and/or [Allow User to Lock Out].
When [Allow User to Lock Out] is selected, the [Lock Out Printer] button needs to be
displayed on the right side of the [Services Home] screen.
For information on how to display the [Lock Out Printer] button on the [Services Home] screen, refer to
"Assigning Services to <Custom> Buttons" (P.19).
Set Lockout Duration

Set the time period to disable printing.
Specify the start and end time to disable printing in 1 minute increments.
109
5 Tools
Allow User to Lock Out

Selecting [Lock Out Printer] on the [Services Home] screen temporarily disables printing.
[Release Printer] is displayed during the printer lockout duration. Selecting [Release Printer]
enables printing.
Note A job started before the start time will be printed continuously even after elapsing the start
time. The job will be printed continuously even if you select [Lock Out Printer] while printing.
After the job is completed, the machine enters the printer lockout status.
When both [Set Lockout Duration] and [Allow User to Lock Out] are set and the start time
comes while the [Release Printer] button is displayed, the machine automatically enters the
printer lockout status.
When you select [Release Printer] during the printer lockout duration, printing is enabled,
and when you then select [Lock Out Printer], the machine resumes the printer lockout status.
The printer lockout status is not released automatically even after the end time has elapsed.
To release the printer lockout status, the control panel operation is required.
The printer lockout duration will not be released even when you switch the power off and
then on again, or even when you press the <Energy Saver> button while the machine is in
the Energy Saver mode (Low Power mode or Sleep mode).
The machine starts printing in accordance with the setting in [Auto Print] when [Release
Printer] is selected. Thus printing may not start immediately after [Release Printer] is
selected.
You can also print during the printer lockout duration by selecting a job in [Active Jobs] on
the [Job Status] screen and then selecting [Promote Job].
Tools
Energy Saver Timers

The Energy Saver mode has two modes: Low Power mode and Sleep mode. When a
5 specified period of time has elapsed, the machine switches to these modes in the following
order to reduce power consumption.
Last operation on the machine J Low Power mode J Sleep mode
For more information on the setting procedure, refer to "Energy Saver Mode" (P.14).
Note You cannot configure the machine not to switch to Low Power mode or Sleep mode.
From Last Operation to Low Power Mode

Specify a time period between 1 and 240 minutes in 1 minute increments to enter Low Power
mode after the last operation.
From Last Operation to Sleep Mode

Specify a time period between 1 to 240 minutes in 1 minute increments to enter Sleep mode
after the last operation.
Note Configure the [From Last Operation to Sleep Mode] time to be longer than the [From Last
Operation to Low Power Mode] time.
Time Zone
Set the time difference from GMT between -12 and +12 hours.
Note GMT stands for Greenwich Mean Time.
Daylight Savings
You can set daylight saving time. During daylight saving time period, the machine moves the
clock forward by one hour.
Select from [Adjust Off], [Adjust by Month, Day & Time], and [Adjust by Month, Week, Day of
Week & Time].
If you select [Adjust by Month, Day & Time], specify the month, day, and time for [Start Date]
and [End Date].
If you select [Adjust by Month, Week, Day of Week & Time], specify the month, week, day of
week, and time for [Start Date] and [End Date].
110
Audio Tones
Select whether to sound an alarm when a job ends or a fault occurs.
Control Panel Select Tone

Set the volume to be sounded when a button on the control panel is correctly selected.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].
Control Panel Alert Tone

Set the volume to be sounded when a button that cannot be selected is selected, or an error
occurs.
Base Tone
Set the volume for the base tone of the toggle button, which changes setting each time it is
pressed. The machine plays this sound when it exits the Interrupt mode.
Machine Ready Tone

Set the volume to be sounded when the machine is ready to copy or print, or powered on.
Tools
Job Complete Tone 1, 2

Set the volume to be sounded when a job is completed normally. 5
You can select the target jobs to play the sound.
Fault Tone
Set the volume to be sounded when a job fails.
You can select the target jobs to play the sound.
Auto Clear Alert Tone

Set the volume to be sounded at five seconds before automatically returning to the initial
screen when [Auto Clear] is set to [On].
For information on Auto Clear, refer to "Auto Clear" (P.109).
Alert Tone
Set the volume to be sounded when a fault such as a paper jam occurs, and the job remains
in failure state.
Out of Paper Warning Tone

Set the volume to be sounded when a job is suspended because there is no paper in a tray.
Low Toner Alert Tone

Set the volume to be sounded when the toner cartridge needs replacing.
111
5 Tools
Stored Programming Tone

Set the volume to be sounded while a stored program is being registered.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud].
This tone cannot be disabled.
Stored Programming Complete Tone

Set the volume to be sounded when the call of a stored programming registered is
completed.
Screen/Button Settings
Set screens and buttons.
Screen Default
Set the screen displayed after powering on the machine or canceling the Energy Saver mode.
For more information on the setting procedure, refer to "Customizing the Control Panel" (P.17).
Screen After Auto Clear

Tools
Set the screen displayed after Auto Clear.

For more information on the setting procedure, refer to "Setting the Screen After Auto Clear" (P.18).
5 Auto Display of Login Screen
When the Authentication feature is enabled on the machine, set whether or not to
automatically display the login screen after turning on the machine or canceling the Energy
Saver mode.
Custom Buttons 1 to 3
You can assign services such as Copy and Stored Programming to the custom buttons on the
control panel: Custom Button 1 to Custom Button 3.
To leave a feature unassigned, select [(Not Set)].
Note Copy service is assigned to [Custom Button 1] and Review is assigned to [Custom Button 3]
by factory default.
For more information, refer to "Assigning Services to <Custom> Buttons" (P.19).
Services Home
Services Home - Additional Features

Job Type on Job Status screen

Select the default job types to be shown on the [Completed Jobs] screen under the [Job
Status] screen that is displayed when the <Job Status> button on the control panel is
pressed.
Select from [All Jobs], [Printer & Print from Folder Jobs] and [Scan, Fax, & Internet Fax Jobs].
The [Job Flow & File Transfer] option cannot be used on this machine.
112
Default Language
Select the language displayed on the machine.
There are two ways of selecting the language: set in the System Administration mode and set
by local users.
z Setting in the System Administration mode
The language set here is the standard language that is retained even when the machine is
powered off and on.
z
Setting by local users
The language setting in [Language] in the [Services Home] screen is lost when the machine
is powered off.
Important When [English] is selected, only ASCII characters can be used.
Screen Brightness
You can adjust the screen brightness of the control panel between -16 and +16.
Reconfirm E-mail Recipient

Paper Tray Settings
Tools
Set the items related to the paper and trays, including the type of paper and tray priority.
Custom Paper Name/Color

5
You can name Custom Paper Types 1 to 5 which you can select in [Paper Type] and Custom
Paper Colors 1 to 5 which you can select in [Paper Color] of [Paper Tray Attributes].
You can use letters, numerals, and symbols of up to 24 characters for each name and color.
For example, you can use a name showing its usage, such as "Color" for colored paper, and
"Covers" for bond paper.
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.22).
Paper Tray Attributes

You can set the size and type of paper loaded in trays.
For more information, refer to "Changing the Paper Settings" (P.47).
Change Settings
Select this button, if you change the paper size for the tray or the setting of auto paper
selection.
When you load non-standard size paper in a tray, select [Custom Size], and specify the width
and length. When you load standard size paper in a tray, select [Auto Detect].
Important Align the paper guides against the paper to prevent paper jams or errors. If the machine
cannot detect a tray, use Tray 5.
z Paper Type
Select the type of paper to load in the trays.
Select [Other Media Selection] when the desired paper type cannot be found in the list
displayed.
For information about paper types available on the machine, refer to "Loadable Quantity and Weight for
Supported Paper" (P.24).
113
5 Tools
z Paper Size
When using Trays 1 and 2, you can load both standard size paper and non-standard size
paper.
When you load non-standard size paper in Tray 1, select [Custom Size], and then set the size
in the X (width) direction between 182 and 458 mm and the Y (length) direction between 140
and 300 mm in 1 mm increments. For Tray 2, select [Custom Size], and then set the size in
the X (width) direction between 182 and 432 mm and the Y (length) direction between 140
and 297 mm in 1 mm increments.
When using Trays 3 and 4, and 6 (A4 High Capacity Feeder), you can load standard size
paper only. Select [Auto Detect].
When you load non-standard size paper in Trays 6 and 7 (High Capacity Feeder C1-DS), set
the size in the X (width) direction between 182 and 488 mm and the Y (length) direction
between 182 and 330 mm in 1 mm increments.
z
Paper Color
Set the color of paper. The paper color selected here is displayed as the paper color on the
[Paper Supply] screen.
z
Auto Paper Select
Set the condition for Auto Paper selection. When the color mode selected is used, Auto Paper
selection is enabled. Select from [All Colors], [Color], and [Black & White].
Automatic tray selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is automatically
selected by the machine for copying or printing.
Tools
Customize Paper Supply Screen

Select whether the setting items specified in [Paper Size] or [Auto Paper Select] in [Paper
5 Tray Attributes] are to be displayed on the [Paper Supply] screen.
Disabled
Does not display the items specified in [Paper Size].
Size Detection
Displays the setting in [Paper Size].
Usage (Auto Paper Select)

Displays the setting in [Auto Paper Select].
Paper Tray Attributes on Setup Screen

Select whether or not to display [Paper Tray Attributes] in the [Setup] screen or not.
This setting allows you to select the size and type of paper without entering the System
Administration mode.
Paper Tray Attributes During Loading

Select whether or not to display the [Paper Tray Attributes] screen after the tray is pulled out
or inserted in.
This setting applies to Trays 1 to 4, 6 (optional), and 7 (optional). You cannot apply this
setting to Tray 5.
Paper Tray Priority

Set the priority of the trays to use when paper of the same size and the same orientation is
set in the multiple trays or print data does not include the paper tray information for automatic
tray selection.
Auto Paper selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is automatically
This setting applies to Trays 1 to 4, 6 (optional), and 7 (optional). You cannot apply this
setting to Tray 5.
114
Paper Type Priority

Set the priority of the trays to use when paper of the same size and the same orientation is
set in the multiple trays for automatic tray selection.
Auto Paper selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is automatically
You can set plain paper, recycled paper, plain reload paper, and custom paper 1 to 5.
The paper type setting is prioritized over the paper tray priority settings.
If, however, different paper types appear in the same priority sequence, the paper is
determined by paper tray priority sequence. The tray containing paper type set to [Auto Paper
Off] is not selected by automatic tray selection.
For more information about the tray priority sequence, refer to "Paper Tray Priority" (P.114).
Tray 5 - Paper Size Defaults

Select the paper sizes displayed in the [Tray 5] screen in [Paper Supply] when copying with
Tray 5.
You can assign the paper size selected here to the buttons for [Standard Size] in the [Tray 5]
screen.
If you frequently use non-standard size paper for copying, assigning the paper sizes to the
buttons will save your time to specify the size each time. For your convenience, set the
commonly used paper sizes in the upper level.
A/B Series Size
Tools
You can select a paper size from A and B series sizes.
Inch Size
You can select a paper size from inch series sizes. 5
Others
You can select a paper size from other sizes.
Custom Size
You can enter any size. Set the X width between 148 and 488 mm, and the Y length between
100 and 330 mm in 1 mm increments.
Note For open flap envelopes, enter the size with the flap size included.
Auto Tray Switching Control

Set the alternative tray or paper when the paper loaded in the tray selected runs out.
Auto Tray Switching

You can select from [Enable during Auto Select], and [Enable for Same Paper Type/Color].
Note The machine does not switch the tray automatically in the following cases:
- Tray 5 is selected.
- The tray that is set as [Auto Paper Off] in [Paper Type Priority] is selected.
Targeted Paper Type (Copy Jobs)

You can select paper types.
When [According to Priority Assigned] is selected, the paper type is determined according to
the settings in [Paper Type Priority]. When selecting [Selected Paper Type Only], you can
specify the paper type.
Targeted Paper Color (Copy Jobs)

You can target all paper colors or only one paper color.
Note The machine does not switch the tray automatically in the following cases:
- Tray 5 is selected.
- The tray that is set as [Auto Paper Off] in [Paper Type Priority] is selected.
115
5 Tools
Image Quality
You can specify the image quality processing method for each of plain paper, recycled paper,
plain reload paper, hole-punched paper, heavyweight paper, heavyweight reload paper, hole-
punched heavyweight paper, coated paper, coated reload paper, labels, tab stock, postcards,
and custom paper 1 to 5.
When copying or printing a document, the machine controls the image quality according to
the type of paper set in [Paper Tray Attributes] and the image quality processing method
specified for that type of paper.
The following table shows available settings.
For information about paper characteristics and notes, refer to "Loadable Quantity and Weight for
Supported Paper" (P.24).
Setting values Meaning

Plain A Paper having a ream weight of 64 - 79 gsm.
Plain B Paper having a ream weight of 80 - 90 gsm.
Plain C Paper having a ream weight of 91 - 105 gsm.
Plain A Reloaded Suitable for paper already printed on one side. Paper having
a ream weight of 64 - 79 gsm.
Plain B Reloaded Suitable for paper already printed on one side. Paper having
Tools

Plain C Reloaded Suitable for paper already printed on one side. Paper having
5 Recycled A The image quality is suitable for recycled paper with rough
surface. Paper having a ream weight of 64 - 79 gsm.
Recycled B The image quality is suitable for recycled paper with rough
Recycled C The image quality is suitable for recycled paper with rough
Heavyweight A Paper having a ream weight of 106 - 128 gsm.
Heavyweight B Paper having a ream weight of 129 - 150 gsm.
Heavyweight C Paper having a ream weight of 151 - 176 gsm.
HW A Reload Suitable for paper already printed on one side. Paper having
HW B Reload Suitable for paper already printed on one side. Paper having
HW C Reload Suitable for paper already printed on one side. Paper having
Extra-HW Paper having a ream weight of 177 - 220 gsm.
X-HW Reload Suitable for paper already printed on one side. Paper having
X-HW Plus Paper having a ream weight of 221 - 256 gsm.
X-HW Plus Reload Suitable for paper already printed on one side. Paper having
X-HW Plus 2 Paper having a ream weight of 257 - 300 gsm.
X-HW Plus 2 Reload Suitable for paper already printed on one side. Paper having
Punched HW 1A Suitable for hole-punched paper having a ream weight of
106 - 128 gsm.
116
Setting values Meaning

Punched HW 1B Suitable for hole-punched paper having a ream weight of
129 - 150 gsm.
Punched HW 1C Suitable for hole-punched paper having a ream weight of
151 - 176 gsm.
Hole Punched HW 2 Suitable for hole-punched paper having a ream weight of
177 - 220 gsm.
221 - 256 gsm.
257 - 300 gsm.
Gloss A Suitable for coated paper having a ream weight of 106 - 128 gsm.
Gloss B Suitable for coated paper having a ream weight of 129 - 150 gsm.
Gloss A Reload Suitable for coated paper already printed on one side. Paper
having a ream weight of 106 - 128 gsm.
Gloss B Reload Suitable for coated paper already printed on one side. Paper
Tools
Coated 2A Suitable for coated paper having a ream weight of 151 - 176 gsm.
Coated 2B Suitable for coated paper having a ream weight of 177 - 220 gsm.
Coated 2A RL Suitable for coated paper already printed on one side. Paper
5
Coated 2B RL Suitable for coated paper already printed on one side. Paper
Coated 3A Suitable for coated paper having a ream weight of 221 - 256 gsm.
Coated 3B Suitable for coated paper having a ream weight of 257 - 300 gsm.
Coated 3A RL Suitable for coated paper already printed on one side. Paper
Coated 3B RL Suitable for coated paper already printed on one side. Paper
Labels 1A Suitable for labels having a ream weight of 106 - 128 gsm.
Labels 1B Suitable for labels having a ream weight of 129 - 150 gsm.
Labels 1C Suitable for labels having a ream weight of 151 - 176 gsm.
Heavyweight Labels Suitable for labels having a ream weight of 177 - 220 gsm.
Labels 3A Suitable for labels having a ream weight of 221 - 256 gsm.
Labels 3B Suitable for labels having a ream weight of 257 - 300 gsm.
Tab Stock 1A Suitable for tab stock having a ream weight of 106 - 128 gsm.
Tab Stock 1B Suitable for tab stock having a ream weight of 129 - 150 gsm.
Tab Stock 1C Suitable for tab stock having a ream weight of 151 - 176 gsm.
HW Tab Stock Suitable for tab stock having a ream weight of 177 - 220 gsm.
X-HW Tab Stock Suitable for tab stock having a ream weight of 221 - 256 gsm.
X-HW Tab Stock Suitable for tab stock having a ream weight of 257 - 300 gsm.
Transparency Suitable for transparency paper.
Custom Paper 1 to 5 You can select from Plain A, Plain B, Plain C, Recycled A,
Recycled B, and Recycled C.
117
5 Tools
Image Quality Adjustment

You can set the image quality and calibration settings.
Image Quality
You can select the image quality processing method when the machine scans a document.
Photo & Text Recognition

Allows you to change a level with which the machine determines a document as text or
photos. This setting is used when you select [Photo & Text] for [Original Type] on the [Image
Quality] screen.
Selecting [More Text] enables the machine to easily recognize very fine print as text.
Selecting [More Photo] enables the machine to easily recognize halftone images from
newspapers and advertisements as photos.
Output Color Recognition

Allows you to change a level from the five levels with which the machine determines a
document as monochrome or color. This setting is used when you select [Auto Detect] for
[Output Color] on the [Copy] screen.
Selecting [More Black & White] enables the machine to easily recognize monochrome
documents.
Selecting [More Color] enables the machine to easily recognize color documents.
Tools
Photo Reproduction Level

When copying with [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen set to [Photo & Text], you
can adjust the color reproduction level in the areas determined by the machine as photos.
5 Selecting [More Text] yields a bold copy effect, emphasizing the dense parts of an image.
Selecting [More Photo] soften the image gradation of the photo aspects of an image,
enhancing the reproductivity of subtle colors.
Background Suppression (Color Copy)

Set the method of background suppression to be used when making color copies.
Background suppression is the function to detect the density of colors and suppress the scan
of background colors when a document has background colors on colored paper.
Select [High Speed] to sample a section of the document and detect the background color.
Select [High Quality] to conduct a pre-scan, and sample the whole document to detect the
background color.
Important When you select [High Quality], and [Corner Shift] is selected in [Image Shift] with a ratio of
60% or less is specified in [Reduce/Enlarge], a part of the image may not be printed or blank
paper may be output.
Background Suppression (Black Copy)

Set the method of background suppression to be used when making monochrome copies.
Background suppression is the function to detect the density of colors and suppress the scan
of background colors when a document has background colors on colored paper.
background color.
Important When you select [High Quality], and [Corner Shift] is selected in [Image Shift] with a ratio of
60% or less is specified in [Reduce/Enlarge], a part of the image may not be printed or blank
paper may be output.
Background Suppression (Scan Jobs)

Set the method of background suppression to be used for scan operations.
Set how the machine detects density and deletes the background color.
background color.
Important When you use the document feeder, the machine detects the background color with [High
Speed], even when [High Quality] is selected.
118
Image Enhancement
Allows you to select whether to carry out image enhancement. If you select [On], the machine
gives the image a smoother appearance when printed.
Calibration
When color gradation of a printed image shifts, you can calibrate the color of the image to
maintain the image quality of the machine at a certain level.
For more information, refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.79).
Note If you cannot calibrate the machine to adjust for a shift in color gradation despite the periodic
calibration, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
Screen Type
Select from [Copy Job 1], [Copy Job 2], [Print Job 1], and [Print Job 2].
For more information about screen type, refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.79).
Paper Supply
Select a tray.
Target
Select from [Copy & Print Jobs], [Copy Jobs Only], [Print Jobs Only], and [None].
Reports
Tools
You can configure settings related to printing reports.
Print Reports Button

5
Set the display method of [Print Reports] under the [Machine Information] screen and [Error
History Report] under the [Faults] screen displayed by pressing the <Machine Status> button.
If you select [Disabled], the [Print Reports] button under [Machine Status] > [Machine
Information] and the [Error History Report] button under [Faults] are displayed only in the
System Administration mode.
For information on Print Reports, refer to "Print Reports" (P.87).
For information on Error History Reports, refer to "Faults" (P.92).
Job History Report

Select whether or not to automatically print a Job History Report when a total of 50 jobs have
been processed. All jobs are automatically listed on the printed report.
For information on how to print a Job History Report manually, refer to "Print Reports" (P.87).
Scan File Transfer Report

2 Sided Report
Select whether or not to print a report on one side of the paper or both sides when printing a
report/list.
Job Flow Error Report

119
5 Tools
Maintenance
You can delete data from the hard disk of the machine.
Initialize Hard Disk

Delete All Data

This feature is designed to prevent the leakage of confidential information of a customer
when the machine is returned to Fuji Xerox. By executing [Start], all data registered on the
machine is deleted.
Do not use this feature normally.
Software Options
This feature is for service representative use. For more information, contact your local Fuji
Power on Self Test

Set whether or not to perform self test when the machine is turned on and started up.
If any abnormal condition such as intentional program modification is found during the
Tools
program diagnosis, the machine stops starting up and records the information in the audit log.
Note The information may not be recorded in the audit log depending on the status of program
malfunction.
5 If the machine does not start, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
Alignment Adjustment
Adjust settings for printed images (position of image, scaling, squareness (rhombic
transformation), and tilt extent). You can adjust up to 20 configuration sets and assign them
to different trays.
Use this feature to align the positions of images printed on sides 1 and 2 when you want to
add crop marks or cut printouts.
Alignment Adjustment Type Setup

You can create up to 20 configuration sets based, for example, on paper type.
For information on how to configure the sets, refer to "Alignment Adjustment Settings" (P.282).
z Name
Select a name for the configuration set.
z
X Print Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the image in relation to the paper feed direction in 0.1 mm
increments for sides 1 and 2 separately.
Specify a positive value to move the image in the direction opposite the paper feed, and
specify a negative value to move the image in the same direction as the paper feed.
z Y Print Position
Adjust the vertical position of the image in relation to the paper feed direction in 0.1 mm
increments for sides 1 and 2 separately.
Specify a positive value to move the image in the direction towards the rear of the machine,
and specify a negative value to move the image in the direction towards the front of the
machine.
120
z X% - Magnification Width
Adjust the size of the image (resize) horizontally in relation to the paper feed direction in
increments of 0.025% for sides 1 and 2 separately.
Specify a positive value to enlarge the image size, and specify a negative value to reduce it.
z
Y% - Magnification Length
Adjust the size of the image (resize) vertically in relation to the paper feed direction in
increments of 0.025% for sides 1 and 2 separately.
Specify a positive value to enlarge the image size, and specify a negative value to reduce it.
z
Perpendicularity
Adjust the slant (skew) of the image in 0.1 mm increments for sides 1 and 2 separately.
Specify a positive value to slant the image in the direction opposite the paper feed, and
specify a negative value to slant the image in the same direction as the paper feed.
z Skew
Adjust the tilt level of the image in 0.1 mm increments for sides 1 and 2 separately.
Place the document so that the paper feed direction is on your right. Specify a positive value
to tilt the image counterclockwise, and specify a negative value to tilt the image clockwise.
z
Tray 1 - 7
Assign the set alignment type to a tray.
Finisher Adjustment
Tools
This feature is displayed when a finisher is installed.
Adjust Fold Position

When outputting copies using a folding or booklet binding option, you can adjust the folding
position. You can set an appropriate folding position in accordance with the type and size of 5
paper selected and register it to one of [Type 1] to [Type 10].
For information on how to adjust the fold position, refer to "Adjust Fold Position" (P.291).
z Fold Position Type Setup
Adjust the fold position for single fold, booklet, C fold, Z fold, and Z fold half sheet.
z
Tray 1 to 4, 6 and 7
Assign the set adjustment type to a tray.
Adjust Image Transfer

When the toner image is not satisfactorily transferred onto the paper, you can adjust the
transfer output value for each type of paper.
For details on adjusting transfer output, refer to "Adjust Image Transfer" (P.300).
Delete All Certificates/Initialize Settings

121
5 Tools
Watermark
Watermark is the function to print text or background pattern on the whole page to
inhibit the replication of documents.
You can configure Watermark settings such as date or text, background pattern, and
watermark to embed.
Date Format
Set the format for printing dates. This setting is common to Annotation, Watermark, and
Force Annotation.
Three date formats are available: YYYY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YYYY, and DD/MM/YYYY.
Default Watermark Effect

Set the default type of text effect for Watermark.
Off
A text effect is not applied.
Embossed
When you re-copy a copied document with watermark, the text hidden in the background is
printed as embossed text.
Tools
Outline
When you re-copy a copied document with watermark, the text hidden in the background is
printed as white cutout.
5 Default Watermark
Set watermark text.
You can select text from [Copy Prohibited], [Copy], [Duplicate], and the strings assigned to
Custom Watermark 1 to 3.
For more information about custom text, refer to "Custom Watermark 1 to 3" (P.123).
Font Size
Set the size of the text to be printed as the Watermark.
You can set the font size from 24 to 80 points in 1 point increments.
Background Pattern
Set the background pattern to embed the text for the Watermark effect.
You can select from eight patterns: [Wave], [Circle], [Stripe], [Chain], [Beam], [Rhombic],
[Sunflower], and [Fan].
Font Color
Specify a hidden text color used for the Watermark feature.
You can select from [Black], [Magenta], and [Cyan].
Density
Select the text density of the Watermark.
You can select from [Lighten], [Normal], and [Darken].
Watermark/Background Contrast
Set a contrast level for text and background for the Watermark.
You can select a level from 1 to 9. Select a contrast level, referring to the printed samples by
selecting [Print this Sample List].
122
Force Watermark - Copy

Set whether or not to forcibly use the Watermark feature when copying a document. When
you select [On], the setting of [Watermark] in the [Output Format] screen is fixed to [On] and
you cannot change the setting.
The user ID, machine ID, and date and time are printed.
Note You can authorize a user to temporarily cancel force watermark printing. For more
information, refer to "User Roles and Authorization Groups" (P.171).
Force Watermark - Client Print

Force Watermark - Print Store File

Custom Watermark 1 to 3
Register text to be printed as the Watermark. You can enter up to 32 single-byte characters.
The registered text is displayed at [Default Watermark].
Print this Sample List
Tools
Prints hidden text samples of various densities. Select [Watermark/Background Contrast],
referring to the print samples.
5
Force Annotation
Annotation is forcibly printed out according to the layout template associated with each
job type.
Note When a watermark and/or a print universal unique ID is specified to a document, force
annotation is overlapped.
The layout templates, Preset 1 to Preset 4, are provided with the machine. The printed
items with the templates as follows:
z
Preset 1 and Preset 2
The string registered on [Create Text String 1] is printed as watermark at an angle in
the center of paper.
The following items are printed at the bottom right for Preset 1 or bottom left for
Preset 2 of paper.
- first line: file name and the IP address of the computer that send a print job
- second line: user name, user ID, card ID, and date and time
z
Preset 3 and Preset 4
The string registered on [Create Text String 1] is printed as watermark at an angle in
the center of paper.
The following items are printed at the bottom right for Preset 3 or bottom left for
Preset 4 of paper.
123
5 Tools
- user ID and date and time
DocName-192.168.1.1 DocName-192.168.1.1
UserName-CardID-UserID-2008/09/01 13:08 UserName-CardID-UserID-2008/09/01 13:08 UserID-2008/09/01 13:08 UserID-2008/09/01 13:08
Preset1 Preset2 Preset3 Preset4
Note Some items may not be printed depending on the job type and performance conditions.
Force annotation is not printed on a blank paper generated by the machine.
When the Force Annotation is enabled, you cannot select [Auto Size Detect] for [Tray 5].
A time printed as a watermark using the Force Annotation feature may differ from the time
the print job is submitted depending on the status and settings of the machine and the
contents of the print job. In this case, the print job start time is printed as a watermark.
Apply Layout Template to Copy/Prints Jobs

Tools
Set the association between jobs and layout templates. You can associate layout templates
with Copy and Report jobs.
5 Delete Layout Template
Deletes a layout template.
Important The provided layout templates, Preset 1 to Preset 4, cannot be deleted.
Create Text String

Register text strings for the Force Annotation feature. You can register up to eight types of
strings in [Create Text String 1] to [Create Text String 8]. You can enter up to 64 single-byte
characters.
Important The available text for the provided layout templates, Preset 1 to Preset 4, is the text strings
registered in [Create Text String 1].
Print Universal Unique ID

You can print UUIDs (Universal Unique IDs) for each print job to identify each job.
Note You can authorize a user to temporarily cancel force watermark printing. For more
information, refer to "User Roles and Authorization Groups" (P.171).
If a layout template is specified in [Apply Layout Template to Copy/Print Jobs] under [Force
Annotation], UUIDs are overlapped with the text on the layout template.
For details on Force Annotation, refer to "Force Annotation" (P.123).
Print Universal Unique ID

Select whether or not to print Universal Unique IDs.
Important If [Print Universal Unique ID] is set to [Yes], you cannot select [Auto Detect] for [Tray 5].
Print Position
Select a print position from six positions: [Top Left], [Bottom Left], [Top Center], [Bottom
Center], [Top Right], or [Bottom Right].
124
Print Position Adjustment

Adjust print positions vertically and horizontally from 0 to 100 mm and from 0 to 200 mm
respectively, in 0.5 mm increments.
Note 0 mm is at the edge of paper. Increasing the value moves the print position toward the
center of the paper. However, for [Top Center] or [Bottom Center], the horizontal value for
the center of paper is set to 100 mm. Therefore, when you select [Top Center] or [Bottom
Center], set the value to 100 mm and then specify desired value.
Print Position (Side 2)

Select the position to print the UUID on Side 2 from [Same as Side 1] or [Mirror Side 1] when
making 2 sided copies.
Notify Job Completion by E-mail

Other Settings
You can configure other settings related to the machine.
Tools
Offset Stacking (Right Top Tray)
Offsetting means that each set of copies is delivered to the center tray and shifted slightly to
separate it from the previous job. When a set of copies is delivered to the front of the tray, the
5
next set is delivered to the rear of the tray. Set the offset function for the Right Top Tray.
Select from [Off], [Offset per Set], and [Offset per Job]. When [Offset per Set] or [Offset per
Job] is selected, the machine slightly shifts the output position per set or per job (print job)
respectively.
Note This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is necessary. For
more information, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
Offset Stacking (Right Middle Tray)

Offsetting means that each set of copies is delivered to the lower tray and shifted slightly to
separate it from the previous job. When a set of copies is delivered to the front of the tray, the
next set is delivered to the rear of the tray. Set the offset function for the Right Middle Tray.
Select from [No Offset], [Offset per Set], and [Offset per Job]. When [Offset per Set] or [Offset
per Job] is selected, the machine slightly shifts the output position per set or per job (print job)
respectively.
Note This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more
information, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
Auto Job Promotion

You can select whether or not to allow another job to automatically bypass the current job
when the machine is unable to start an operation for any reason, (for example, running out of
paper in a tray when starting copying or printing).
Note Stored documents such as Sample Set documents cannot be used with the Auto Job
Promotion feature.
When [Enabled] is selected and there is a job bypassed because of paper out, a message
stating the reason of the job promotion appears. The job bypassed can be processed after
you take proper measures by following the instruction of the message. Or, you can cancel
the job by pressing the <Clear All> button. When multiple jobs are bypassed, a screen that
lists the bypassed jobs appears. This screen allows you to display the details screen and to
delete the jobs.
125
5 Tools
Default Print Paper Size

You can set the paper size, A4 or 8.5 x 11" to print reports and/or lists.
Paper Size Settings

You can specify the size of paper to be automatically detected when you use standard sizes
of a document or the machine is set to detect sizes of a document.
You can select from the following tables: [A/B Series (8 x 13")], [A/B Series], [A/B Series (8K/
16K)], [A/B Series (8 x 13/8 x 14")], and [Inch Series].
Refer to the following tables for a combination of sizes that can be detected automatically.
Paper size group A/B series (8 x 13") A/B series
Tray 6 (High Capacity Feeder C1-DS)

Tray 6 (A4 High Capacity Feeder)

Loading
position
Document feeder
Document feeder
Document glass
Document glass
Trays 1 and 2
Trays 3 and 4
Trays 1 and 2
Trays 3 and 4
Tray 5
Tray 5
Size/
Orientation
Tools
A6 O X X X X X X O X X X X X X
5 A5 O O O X O X X O O O X O X X
A5 O X X X X X X O O X X X X X
A4 O O O X X X O O O O X O X O
A4 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
A3 O O O X O X O O O O X O X O
B6 O X X X X X X O X X X X X X
B6 X X X X X X X O X X X X X X
B5 X X O X O X O O O O X O X O
B5 X O O O O O O O O O O O O O
B4 X O O X O X O O O O X O X O
5.5 x 8.5" X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
5.5 x 8.5" X O X X X X X X X X X X X X
7.25 x 10.5" O O X X X X X X X X X X X X
8 x 10" X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
8 x 10" X X X X X X O X X X X X X O
8.5 x 11" X O O X X X O X O O X X X O
8.5 x 11" O O O O X O O X O O O X O O
8.5 x 13" O O O X O X O X X O X X X O
8.5 x 14" X X O X O X O X X O X X X O
11 x 17" O O O X X X O X O O X X X O
16 K (Taiwan) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
16 K (Taiwan) X X O X X X O X O O X X X O
8K (Taiwan) X X X X X X X X O X X X X X
16 K (Mainland
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
China)
126
Paper size group A/B series (8 x 13") A/B series


Loading
position
Document feeder
Document feeder
Document glass
Document glass
Trays 1 and 2
Trays 3 and 4
Trays 1 and 2
Trays 3 and 4
Tray 5
Tray 5
Size/
Orientation
16 K (Mainland
X X O X X X O X O O X X X O
China)
8 K (Mainland
X X X X X X X X O X X X X X
China)
SRA3
X X X X X X O X X X X X X O
(12.6 x 17.7")
Tools
12.6 x 19.2" X X X X X X O X X X X X X O
Postcard X X X X X X O X X X X X X O 5
No.3 standard
envelopes
No.2 standard
envelopes
Photo 2L X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Photo 2L X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
O: Available
X: Not available
A/B series A/B series

Paper size group Inch series
(8 K / 16 K) (8 x 13 / 8 x 14")

Loading
Document feeder
Document feeder
Document feeder
position
Document glass
Document glass
Document glass
Trays 1 and 2
Trays 3 and 4
Trays 1 and 2
Trays 3 and 4
Trays 1 and 2
Trays 3 and 4
Tray 5
Tray 5
Tray 5
Size/
Orientation
A6 O X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X
A5 O O O X O X X O O O X O X X X X X X X X X
A5 O O X X X X X O X X X X X X X O X X X X X
127
5 Tools

(8 K / 16 K) (8 x 13 / 8 x 14")


Loading
Document feeder
Document feeder
Document feeder
position
Document glass
Document glass
Document glass
Trays 1 and 2
Trays 3 and 4
Trays 1 and 2
Trays 3 and 4
Trays 1 and 2
Trays 3 and 4
Tray 5
Tray 5
Tray 5
Size/
Orientation
A4 O O O X O X O O O O X X X O X O O X X X O
A4 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O X O O
A3 O O O X O X O O O O X O X O O O O X X X O
B6 O X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X
B6 O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Tools
B5 O O O X O X O O X O X O X O X X O X O X O
B5 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O X O X X X X O
B4 O O O X O X O O O O X O X O X O O X X X O
5 5.5 x 8.5" X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O X O X X
5.5 x 8.5" X X X X X X X O O X X X X X O O X X X X X
7.25 x 10.5" X X X X X X X X O X X X X X O O O O X O O
8 x 10" X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X
8 x 10" X X X X X X O X X X X X X O X X X X X X O
8.5 x 11" X O O X X X O O O O X X X O O O O X O X O
8.5 x 11" O O O O X O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O
8.5 x 13" X X O X X X O O O O X O X O X X O X X X O
8.5 x 14" X X O X X X O X X O X O X O O O O X O X O
11 x 17" O O O X X X O O O O X X X O O O O X O X O
16 K (Taiwan) O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
16 K (Taiwan) O O O X X X O X X O X X X O X X X X X X X
8K (Taiwan) O O O X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
16 K (Mainland
O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
China)
16 K (Mainland
O O O X X X O X X O X X X O X X X X X X X
China)
8 K (Mainland
O O O X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
China)
SRA3
X X X X X X O X X X X X X O X X X X X X O
(12.6 x 17.7")
12.6 x 19.2" X X X X X X O X X X X X X O X X X X X X O
Postcard X X X X X X O X X X X X X O X X X X X X O
128

(8 K / 16 K) (8 x 13 / 8 x 14")


Loading
Document feeder
Document feeder
Document feeder
position
Document glass
Document glass
Document glass
Trays 1 and 2
Trays 3 and 4
Trays 1 and 2
Trays 3 and 4
Trays 1 and 2
Trays 3 and 4
Tray 5
Tray 5
Tray 5
Size/
Orientation
No.3 standard
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
envelopes
No.2 standard
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
envelopes
Photo 2L X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X
Photo 2L X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Tools
4 x 6" X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X
4 x 6" X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
O: Available
X: Not available
5
Millimeters/Inches
Allows you to select unit of measurement displayed on the screen from [Millimeters] or
[Inches].
Keyboard Input Restriction

Allows you to select whether or not to restrict the display of the virtual keyboard of the
machine. To prevent characters from being garbled when switching character sets, you can
limit input to ASCII characters. If you select [On (ASCII Only)], the keyboard displayed shows
ASCII characters only.
Operation of Up/Down Buttons

Allows you to whether or not to enable continuous scrolling when pressing the scroll buttons.
Display Consumables Screen

Allows you to select whether or not to display the consumables status when a replacement is
required.
Off
Does not display the consumables status screen.
When power is switched on

Displays the consumables status screen at startup.
When Auto Clear is activated

Displays the consumables status screen when Auto Clear is executed.
129
5 Tools
Data Encryption
Allows you to select whether or not to encrypt data recorded on the hard disk of the machine.
When you enable data encryption, the machine encrypts automatically copy data written to
the hard disk. You cannot select whether or not to encrypt by feature. This prevents
unauthorized access to the stored data. To activate this feature, set an encryption key.
1 Select [Data Encryption].

2 Select [On].
3 Select [New Encryption Key], and enter an encryption key of 1 to 12 single-byte

characters, and then select [Save].
4 Select [Re-enter Encryption Key], enter the same encryption key, and then select
[Save].
Tools
5 Select [Save].
5 Data Restoration
The encrypted data cannot be restored in the following cases:
z
When a problem occurs with the hard disk.
z When you have forgotten the encryption key.
z
When you have forgotten the system administrators user ID and a passcode when [On] is
selected in [Service Rep. Restricted Operation].
Starting the Data Encryption and Changing Settings

When you select/deselect data encryption or change the encryption key, you must restart the
machine. When the machine reboots, the machine initializes part of the disk area. The
previous data is not secured.
The disk area stores the following data.
- Spooled print data
- Forms for the Form Overlay feature
Important Be sure to save all necessary settings and files before using data encryption or changing
any settings.
Make sure that the hard disk and encryption settings match. Otherwise, an error will occur.
For information on error messages and their remedies, refer to "Other Errors" (P.219).
Our service representative cannot restore the encryption key.
When our service representative replaces the electrical circuit board, the encryption key is
initialized. Do not lose the encrypted information.
Encryption Key for Confidential Data

Allows you to set an encryption key to encrypt confidential information such as the passcode
of the system administrator and a folder. Encrypting confidential information prevents a
network hacking and an unauthorized access to the information.
Enter an encryption key of 4 to 12 single-byte characters using alphanumeric characters.
Important If you change the existing encryption key, you may not restore confidential information from
a backup.
Note The factory default encryption key is "x-admin".
130
1 Select [Encryption Key for Confidential Data], and then [Change Settings].
2 Select [New Encryption Key], and enter an encryption key, and then select [Save].
3 Select [Re-enter Encryption Key], enter the same encryption key, and then select
[Save].
4 Select [Save] to display a confirmation screen. Select [Yes] on the screen to save the
setting.
Service Rep. Restricted Operation

Allows you to select whether or not to restrict the operation by our service representative to
protect the security settings from being altered by someone impersonating our service
representative.
Off
The operation by our service representative is not restricted.
On
Our service representative cannot change the following settings:
z "Delete All Data" (P.120)
z
"Print Universal Unique ID" (P.124)
Tools
z "Data Encryption" (P.130)
"Encryption Key for Confidential Data" (P.130)
5
z
z
"Service Rep. Restricted Operation" (P.131)
z "System Administrator Settings" (P.158)
z "Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator" (P.162)r
z
"Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.164)
z Creating/Changing Users with System Administrator Rights
When [On] is set, you can set a maintenance passcode of 4 to 12 digits in the [Maintenance
Passcode] screen.
Entering the passcode is required when our service representative performs maintenance.
Important When [On] is set, be sure the followings:
- If you lose the system administrators user ID and passcode, the items restricted to the
service representative cannot be changed.
- If you lose the passcode, our service representative cannot perform maintenance in the
case when an error occurs in the machine.
To change the restricted items or perform maintenance, the electric circuit board of the
machine must be replaced.
You will be charged for the electrical circuit board and handling cost.
Be sure not to lose the system administrators user ID and passcode.
Note An optional component is required to use this feature. For more information, contact your
local Fuji Xerox representative.
For information on the system administrator permissions, refer to "User Roles" (P.171).
Software Download
You can select whether or not to permit software downloading. This feature is for service
representative use. For more information, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
Document Feeder Tray Elevation

When a document is loaded in the document feeder, set to which timing to raise an elevator
tray can be performed. Select either [When loading originals] or [When pressing Start].
Note This feature does not appear for some models.
131
5 Tools
Gloss Level
Allows you to set whether or not to display Gloss Level.
If you select [Enabled], the [Gloss Level] button is displayed in [Image Quality] under the
[Copy] screen.
Estimated Job Time

If the estimated time for print waiting jobs is set to be displayed, you can set the information to
be displayed.
Cumulative time for all jobs

Displays the time left.
Time required for single job

Displays the time required.
Restrict Recipient Selection Method

Restrict User to Edit Address Book

Tools
Auto Validation of Speed Dial Entry

5 Data Indicator
132
In [Copy Service Settings], you can configure settings related to the Copy feature. The
following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Copy Tab - Features Allocation ............................................................................................... 133
Preset Buttons........................................................................................................................... 134
Copy Defaults........................................................................................................................... 134
Copy Control ............................................................................................................................ 139
Original Size Defaults .............................................................................................................. 141
Reduce/Enlarge Presets ............................................................................................................ 141
Custom Colors.......................................................................................................................... 142
Annotations - Create Comments .............................................................................................. 142
1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Copy Service Settings].
For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.98).
Tools
Copy Tab - Features Allocation
You can customize the features displayed on the [Copy] screen. Setting the most 5
frequently used features enables you to avoid extra operations such as selecting tabs.
1 Select the number of features to be

displayed on the [Copy] screen.
5 Features
The following five features are shown on the screen: [Output Color], [Reduce/Enlarge],
[Paper Supply], [2 Sided Copying], and [Copy Output]. Features and positions displayed
cannot be changed.
7 Features
Allows you to set features appearing in the fourth column from the left of the [Copy] screen.
Note [Output Color], [Reduce/Enlarge], and [Paper Supply] cannot be specified.
10 Features
Allows you to set features appearing in the third and fourth columns from the left of the [Copy]
screen.
Note [Reduce/Enlarge] and [Paper Supply] cannot be specified.
2 From [Frequently Used Features] on the right of the screen, select a button and the
position of the button where you want to allocate a feature.
Note The position of each button on the right side corresponds to the position on the [Copy]
screen.
3 Select a feature to display, and select [Save].
Note Select [ ] to display the previous screen or [ ] to display the next screen.
133
5 Tools
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required.

5 Select [Save].
Preset Buttons
Paper Supply - Button 2 - 5

Select the paper tray displayed in the second to fifth buttons in [Paper Supply] on the [Copy]
screen.
Reduce/Enlarge - Button 3 - 4
Select the magnification ratio displayed in the third to fourth buttons in [Reduce/Enlarge] on
the [Copy] screen.
Select the ratio from the R/E Preset buttons registered.
Front Cover Tray - Button 1 - 3

Set the default value of the front cover tray displayed in [Covers] on the [Output Format] screen.
Back Cover Tray - Button 1 - 3

Tools
Set the default value of the back cover tray displayed in [Covers] on the [Output Format] screen.
5 Transparency Tray - Button 1 - 3

Set the default value of the transparency tray displayed in [Transparency Options] on the
[Output Format] screen.
Separator & Handout Tray - Button 1 - 3

Set the default value of the separator & handout tray displayed in [Transparency Options] on
the [Output Format] screen.
Copy Defaults
You can set the default settings of the Copy feature. When the machine is turned on,
or the machine exits the Energy Saver mode, or when the <Clear All> button is
pressed, the machine resets to the default values set here. Setting frequently used
features and values as the defaults can avoid extra operations required during the use
of the machine.
For more information on each setting item, refer to "3 Copy" in the User Guide.
Paper Supply
Set the default value for [Paper Supply] in the [Copy] screen.
When the default value of [Reduce/Enlarge] is set to [Auto %], [Auto Select] cannot be
selected for [Paper Supply].
Reduce/Enlarge
Set the default value for [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Copy] screen.
Select the ratio from [100%], [Auto %], and the buttons registered as R/E Preset buttons.
When the default value of [Paper Supply] is set to [Auto Select], [Auto %] cannot be selected
for [Reduce/Enlarge].
For information on R/E Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.141).
134
Output Color
Set the default value for [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen.
When [No Default] is selected, select the output color in the [Copy] screen before making
copies.
Single Color
Set the default value for [Single Color] in [More...] of [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen. You
can select a color from six preset colors and six custom colors.
For information about custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.142).
Dual Color - Source Color

Set the default value for [Source Color] that appears when [Dual Color] is selected for
[More...] of [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen.
Selecting [Color] enables you to select a color from six colors.
Dual Color - Target Area Color

Set the default value for [Target Area Color] that appears when [Dual Color] is selected for
[More...] of [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen. You can select a color from seven preset
colors and six custom colors.
Tools
Dual Color - Non-target Area Color
Set the default value for [Non-target Area Color] that appears when [Dual Color] is selected
for [More...] of [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen. You can select a color from seven preset
5
colors and six custom colors.
Original Type
Set the default value for [Original Type] on the [Image Quality] screen.
Original Type - Auto (Non-Black & White)

Set the default value for [Original Type] on the [Image Quality] screen.
This is valid when a color other than [Black & White] is selected for [Output Color] in the
[Copy] screen.
Original Type - Auto (Black & White)

Set the default value for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.
This is valid when [Black & White] is selected for [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen.
Lighten/Darken
Set the default value for [Lighten/Darken] of [Image Options] in the [Image Quality] screen.
Contrast
Set the default value for [Contrast] of [Image Enhancement] in the [Image Quality] screen.
Sharpness
Set the default value for [Sharpness] of [Image Options] in the [Image Quality] screen.
Saturation
Set the default value for [Saturation] of [Image Options] in the [Image Quality] screen.
135
5 Tools
Background Suppression
Set the default value for [Suppress Background] of [Image Enhancement] in the [Image
Quality] screen.
[Background Suppression] is valid when [Original Type] is set to [Photo & Text], [Text], or
[Maps].
Color Balance - Yellow / Color Balance - Magenta / Color Balance - Cyan / Color Balance -
Black
Set the default density levels for the [Color Balance] in the [Image Quality] screen.
You can set density levels of each color for each of the [Highlights], [Midtones], and
[Shadows].
Note Depending on the density level settings, [Color Balance] in the [Image Quality] screen is set
as follows:
- When the density levels of all colors are set to [0,0,0], [Color Balance] in the [Image quality]
screen is set to [Normal].
- When the same value is set to all levels for each color (for example: [0,0,0] or [1,1,1]),
[Color Balance] in the [Image Quality] screen is set to [Basic Color].
- When the settings other than the ones described above are applied, [Color Balance] in the
[Image Quality] screen is set to [Advanced Color].
Color Shift
Tools
Set the default value for [Color Shift] in the [Image Quality] screen.
5 2 Sided Copying
Set the default value for [2 Sided Copying] in the [Copy], [Layout Adjustment], and [Output
Format] screens.
Mixed Size Originals

Set the default value for [Mixed Size Originals] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Edge Erase - Top Edge

Set the default value for the amount of edge erased from the original in the top directions in
[Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Set the value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm
increments.
Note You cannot copy the whole area even if you set [0] to [Edge Erase - Top Edge].
Edge Erase - Bottom Edge

Set the default value for the amount of edge erased from the original in the bottom directions
in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Set the value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm
increments.
Note You cannot copy the whole area even if you set [0] to [Edge Erase - Bottom Edge].
Edge Erase - Left Edge

Set the default value for the amount of edge erased from the original in the left directions in
increments.
Note You cannot copy the whole area even if you set [0] to [Edge Erase - Left Edge].
Edge Erase - Right Edge

Set the default value for the amount of edge erased from the original in the right directions in
increments.
Note You cannot copy the whole area even if you set [0] to [Edge Erase - Right Edge].
136
Center Erase/Binding Edge Erase

Set the default value for [Center] in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Set the
value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
Note You cannot copy the whole area even if you set [0] to [Center Erase/Binding Edge Erase].
Edge Erase - 2 Sided Original - Side 2

Set the default value for [2 Sided Original - Side 2] of [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment]
screen.
Image Shift - Side 1

Set the default value for [Side 1] of [Image Shift] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Image Shift - Side 2

Set the default value for [Side 2] of [Image Shift] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Image Rotation
Set the default value for [Image Rotation] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Image Rotation - Rotation Direction
Tools
Set the default value for [Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] of [Image Rotation] in the
[Layout Adjustment] screen.
Original Orientation 5
Set the default value for [Original Orientation] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Pages per Side

Set the default value for [Pages per Side] in the [Copy] and [Output Format] screens.
Copy Output
Set the default value for [Copy Output] in the [Copy] screen.
Uncollated - Default Separator Tray

Set the default value for [Separators Tray] of [Uncollated with Separators] in the [Copy
Output] screen.
Output Destination
Set the default value for [Output/Offset] of [Copy Output] in the [Copy] screen.
Face Up/Down Option

Set the default value for [Face Up/Down Output] in the [Output Format] screen.
Sample Job
Set the default value for [Sample Job] in the [Job Assembly] screen.
Annotations - Stored Comment

Set the default value for [Stored Comments] displayed when [On] is selected for [Comment]
of [Annotations] in the [Output Format] screen.
You can select a comment type from eight preset types and custom text registered.
For information about how to set custom text, refer to "Annotations - Create Comments" (P.142).
137
5 Tools
Annotations - Comment on Side 1 and Side 2

Set the default value for [Position] displayed when [On] is selected for [Comment] of
[Annotations] in the [Output Format] screen.
Annotations - Comment - Font Size

Set the default value for [Font Size] under [Format & Style] displayed when [On] is selected
for [Comment] of [Annotations] in the [Output Format] screen.
Annotations - Comment - Font Color

Set the default value for [Font Color] under [Format & Style] displayed when [On] is selected
for [Comment] of [Annotations] in the [Output Format] screen.
Date - Position on Side 1 and Side 2

Set the default value for [Position] displayed when [Date Stamp] is selected for [Annotations]
in the [Output Format] screen.
Date - Font Size

Set the default value for [Font Size] under [Font Size] displayed when [Date Stamp] is
selected for [Annotations] in the [Output Format] screen.
Tools
Page Numbers - Style

Set the default value for [Style] displayed when [Page Numbers] is selected for [Annotations]
5 in the [Output Format] screen.
Page Numbers - Position on Side 1 and Side 2

Set the default value for [Position] displayed when [Page Numbers] is selected for
Page Numbers - Font Size

Set the default value for [Font Size] under [Font Size] displayed when [Page Numbers] is
Bates Stamp - Number of Digits

Set the default value for [Number of Digits] displayed when [Bates Stamp] is selected for
Bates Stamp - Position on Side 1 and Side 2

Set the default value for [Position] displayed when [Bates Stamp] is selected for [Annotations]
in the [Output Format] screen.
Bates Stamp - Font Size

Set the default value for [Font Size] under [Font Size] displayed when [Bates Stamp] is
Tab Margin Shift - Shift Value

Set the default value for [Shift Value] of [Tab Margin Shift] in the [Output Format] screen.
Booklet Creation - Default Cover Tray

Set the default value for [Covers] which is displayed when you select a Cover option in the
[Booklet Creation] screen.
138
Covers - Default Front Cover Tray, Default Back Cover Tray

Set the default values for [Front Cover] and [Back Cover] which are displayed when you
select Front Cover and Back Cover options in the [Covers] screen.
Separators - Default Separator Tray

Set the default value for [Segment Separator Tray] under [Segment Separators] which is
displayed when you set [Build Job] to [Build Job On] in the [Job Assembly] screen.
Copy Control
You can configure settings related to copy operation control.
Memory Full Procedure

If there is insufficient hard disk memory while scanning a document, a screen appears asking
you how you want to handle the partially stored data.
Set the process you want the machine to perform for the partially stored data after a certain
time has elapsed in the confirmation screen.
You can set the time until the memory full procedure is carried out. For more information, refer to "Auto
Job Release" (P.109).
Tools
Delete Job
Deletes the data partially stored.
Run Job
Treats the read-in data as valid, and start copying the document partially stored.
5
Maximum Stored Pages
Set the maximum number of pages stored for a copy document. You can set from 1 to 999
pages.
Auto Paper Off

Select the tray used when [Auto Select] of [Paper Supply] in the [Copy] screen is canceled.
[Auto Select] of [Paper Supply] is canceled when [Auto %], [Auto X-Y %] for [Independent X-
Y %], or [Slight Reduction (Improves Fit)] is selected.
Mixed Size Originals - 2 Sided Copy

Specify paper to copy side 2 of a document: in 2 sided copying, if the size of side 1 and side
2 of a document is different, and the machine detects different paper size for sides 1 and 2.
Important When side 1 and side 2 are different sizes and if side 2 is copied on the sheet on which side
1 has been printed, a part of the image may be missing.
Copy to new sheet

Side 2 is copied as side 1 on a new sheet of paper.
Copy to Side 2
Side 2 is copied on the reverse side of side 1 without changing paper size.
Fine-tune 100%
You can fine-tune magnification when copying at 100% (actual size). The set value is applied
to [100%] in the [Copy] screen is set to 100%.
Set the value in the X/Y direction between 98 and 102% in 0.1% increments.
Important This feature is applied only when a copy is made using the document glass. This setting is
not reflected in the magnification (100%) under [Independent X-Y%] or [Calculator %].
Note A magnification displays [100%] even if [Fine-tune 100%] is selected.
139
5 Tools
ID Card Copy - Reduce/Enlarge

Set the copy magnification ratio when copying ID cards. Selecting [Allow to Change] allows
you to specify the ratio between 25 to 400% in 1% increments.
Note The machine may copy an ID card in a different orientation from the original orientation
depending on the magnification ratio you specified.
Background Suppression (Photo & Text)

Set the background suppression level for color copying. This setting is valid when [Photo &
Text] is selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.
The larger the value, the stronger the effect of removing background noise.
Background Suppression Level (Text)

Set the background suppression level for color copying. This setting is valid when [Text] is
selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.
The larger the value, the stronger the effect of removing background noise.
Photo & Text /Printed Original

Set the type of document when [Printed Original] of [Photo & Text] is selected for [Original
Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.
Tools
Normal
Copies with standard image quality.
5 Inkjet Originals
Select [Inkjet Originals] when copying a document printed with an inkjet printer. This
improves the recognition of inkjet colors.
Highlighted Originals
Select [Highlighted Originals] when copying an original marked with a highlight pen. This
improves the recognition of the colors of highlight pen.
Original Type - See-Through Paper

When [Text] is selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen, set whether or not to
display [Text on See-Through Paper].
Face Up/Down - Reverse Order

Set whether or not to display [Face Up (Reverse Order)] under [Face Up/Down Output] in the
[Output Format] screen.
Face Up/Down - Auto (Single Sheet)

Specify the operation of the machine when [Face Up/Down Output] is set to [Auto] in the
[Output Format] screen, and a single sheet is output.
Annotations - Comment Density

Set the translucency of the comment printed as annotation.
You can select a translucency value from [Darken], [Normal], and [Lighten]. Darken
represents no translucency.
Note If a stamp set to [Darken] density is printed over text, the text may be unreadable.
Comment Position - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top Right, - Left Center, - Center, - Right
Center, - Bottom Left, - Bottom Center, and - Bottom Right
You can adjust the position to print a comment finely.
140
Date Position - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top Right, - Bottom Left, - Bottom Center, and -
Bottom Right
You can adjust the position to print a date stamp finely.
Page Number Position - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top Right, - Bottom Left, - Bottom Center,
and - Bottom Right
You can adjust the position to print a page number finely.
Bates Stamp - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top Right, - Bottom Left, - Bottom Center, and -
Bottom Right
You can adjust the position to print a bates stamp finely.
Quantity Display
You can select how you want to display the counter in the Copy service.
Select from [Quantity], [Quantity and Memory], and [Quantity and Original Count].
Maximum Number of Sets

Set the maximum number of allowed sets to copy between 1 and 9999. Users will not be able
to specify a larger number of sets to copy than the value set here.
Tools
Original Size Defaults
Set the original sizes displayed in [Original Size] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
5
You can assign original sizes to the buttons other than [Auto Detect].
If you frequently make copies of non-standard size document, setting non-standard
size as the default can avoid extra operations required during the use of the machine.
A/B Series Size
You can select a size from A and B series sizes.
Inch Size
You can select a size from inch series sizes.
Others
You can select a size from other sizes.
Custom Size
You can enter any size. Set the width (X) from 15 to 432 mm, and the height (Y) from 15 to
297 mm in 1 mm increments.
Reduce/Enlarge Presets
Set the magnifications displayed as [Preset %] which are displayed when
[Proportional %] is selected under [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Copy] screen.
You can assign any magnification to the R/E Preset buttons other than [100%] and
[Auto %].
141
5 Tools
Custom Colors
Set the custom colors used for [Single Color] and [Dual Color] in the [Output Color]
screen.
You can assign custom colors with yellow (0 to 100%), magenta (0 to 100%), and cyan
(0 to 100%) to each custom color buttons 1 to 6.
Note Adjust so that the total of yellow, magenta, and cyan does not exceed 240%.
Annotations - Create Comments

Register text to print with [Comment] under [Annotation]. You can enter up to 64 single-
byte characters.
For information about how to enter characters, "Entering Text" (P.22).
These settings cannot be used on this machine.

Tools
Print Service Settings

5 These settings cannot be used on this machine.
142
In [Scan Service Settings], you can configure settings related to the Scan services.
The following shows the reference section for each setting.
First Tab ................................................................................................................................... 143
Scan Defaults............................................................................................................................ 143
Scan to PC Defaults.................................................................................................................. 145
Original Size Defaults .............................................................................................................. 145
Output Size Defaults ................................................................................................................ 146
Reduce/Enlarge Presets ............................................................................................................ 146
Other Settings........................................................................................................................... 146
1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Scan Service Settings].
Tools
First Tab 5
Feature in 2nd Column
You can set the features that appear in the second column of the lower part in the First Tab
screen.
You can select from [2 Sided Scanning], [Resolution], [Lighten/Darken], and [Reduce/
Enlarge].
Reduce/Enlarge - Buttons 2 to 5
This item can be set when [Reduce/Enlarge] is selected in [Feature in 2nd Column].
Select the magnification ratio displayed in [Reduce/Enlarge] from the Reduce/Enlarge
Presets registered.
For information about R/E Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.146).
Scan Defaults
You can set the default settings of the Scan services. When the machine is turned on,
or the machine exits the Energy Saver mode, or when the <Clear All> button is
pressed, the machine resets to the default values set here. Setting frequently used
features and values as the defaults can avoid extra operations required during the use
of the machine.
The values set here become valid after the machine turned off and then on.
For more information on each setting item, refer to "4 Scan" in the User Guide.
Color Scanning
Set the default value for [Color Scanning] in the First Tab.
Original Type
Set the default value for [Original Type] in the First Tab.
143
5 Tools
File Format
Set the default value for [File Format] in the First Tab.
Optimize PDF For Quick Web View

Set the default value for [Optimize For Quick Web View] of [File Format] in the First Tab.
Thumbnail - Outgoing E-mail

Thumbnail - Scan to PC
Lighten/Darken
Set the default value for [Lighten/Darken] of [Image Options] in the [Advanced Settings]
screen.
Contrast
Set the default value for [Contrast] of [Image Enhancement] in the [Advanced Settings]
screen. The contrast setting is valid when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color] or [Grayscale].
Tools
Sharpness
5 Set the default value for [Sharpness] of [Image Options] in the [Advanced Settings] screen.
Background Suppression
Set the default value for [Background Suppression] of [Image Enhancement] in the
[Advanced Settings] screen.
Shadow Suppression
Set the default value for [Shadow Suppression] in the [Advanced Settings] screen.
Color Space
Set the default value for [Color Space] in the [Advanced Settings] screen.
Important When [Device Color Space] is selected as default and [Color Space] is set to [Disabled],
[Auto Detect] of [Color Scanning] in the First Tab does not appear.
Original Orientation
Set the default value for [Original Orientation] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Resolution
Set the default value for [Resolution] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
You can select from [200 dpi], [300 dpi], [400 dpi], and [600 dpi].
Mixed Size Originals

Set the default value for [Mixed Size Originals] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Edge Erase
Set the default value for [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. You can select from
[All Edges] and [Parallel Edges].
144
Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges

Set the default value for [Top & Bottom] in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Specify a value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
Edge Erase - Left & Right Edges

Set the default value for [Left & Right] in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Specify a value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
Center Erase/Binding Edge Erase

Set the default value for [Center] in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Specify a
value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
Quality/File Size
Set the default value for [Quality/File Size] in the [Filling Options] screen.
Select from [Quality: Normal/File Size: Small], [Quality: Higher +1/File Size: Larger +1],
[Quality: Higher +2/File Size: Larger +2], [Quality: Higher +3/File Size: Larger +3], and
[Quality: Maximum/File Size: Largest].
E-mail Subject
Tools
Store & Send Link - E-mail Subject
This feature cannot be used on this machine. 5
Scan to PC Defaults
Original Size Defaults

Set the document size displayed in [Original Size] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
You can assign a document size to each of the buttons other than [Auto Detect].
If you frequently use non-standard size paper for scanning, assigning the paper sizes
to the buttons will save your time to specify the size each time.
A/B Series Size
You can select a size from sizes of A and B series such as A4 and B5.
Inch Size
You can select a size from Inch series sizes such as 8.5 x 11" and 11 x 17".
Others
You can select a size from sizes of other than the above series such as photo and postcard
sizes.
Custom Size
You can enter any size. Set the width (X) from 15 to 432 mm, and the height (Y) from 15 to
297 mm in 1 mm increments.
145
5 Tools
Output Size Defaults

Set the sizes to display in [Output Size] when selecting [Enter Output Size] for scanning
documents at [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
You can assign any output size to output size buttons. Assigning the output sizes to the
buttons will save your time to specify the size each time.
A/B Series Size
You can select a size from A and B series sizes such as A4 and B5.
Inch Size
You can select a size from Inch series sizes such as 8.5 x 11" and 11 x 17".
Others
You can select a size from other sizes such as photo and postcard.
Reduce/Enlarge Presets
Set the magnifications displayed as [Preset %] which are displayed when
[Proportional %] is selected under [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
You can assign any magnification to the R/E Preset buttons other than [100%].
Tools
Preset %
Select a ratio from standard magnification ratios.
5 Variable %
You can specify a magnification from 25 to 400% in 1% increments.
Other Settings
You can configure other settings related to the Scan services specifications.
Memory Full Procedure

If there is insufficient hard disk memory while scanning a document, a screen appears asking
you how you want to handle the partially stored data.
Set the process you want the machine to perform for the partially stored data after a certain
time has elapsed in the confirmation screen.
You can set the time until the memory full procedure is carried out. For more information, refer to "Auto
Job Release" (P.109).
Delete Job
Deletes the data partially stored.
Run Job
Treats the read-in data as valid, and start scanning the document partially stored.
Maximum Stored Pages

Set the maximum number of pages stored for a scan document. You can specify from 1 to
999 pages.
Saturation
Set the saturation when scanning a full color document. When a document is scanned,
saturation is automatically adjusted according to the value set here.
146
Background Suppression Level

Set the background suppression level. This is valid when [Background Suppression] is set to
[Auto Suppression].
The larger the value is, the stronger the effect of removing background noise becomes.
Shadow Suppression Level

Set the shadow suppression level. This is valid when [Shadow Suppression] is set to [Auto
Suppression].
Color Space
Set whether or not to display the Color Space feature.
When you select [Enabled], the [Color Space] button is displayed on the [Advanced Settings]
screen.
Important When [Disabled] is selected as default and Color Space is set to [Device Color Space], [Auto
Detect] of [Color Scanning] in the First Tab does not appear.
TIFF Format
Set the TIFF format for scanned data. You can select either [TIFF V6] or [TTN2].
Image Transfer Screen
Tools
Select whether or not to display a message when the scan of a document completes.
Disabled
Does not display a scan completion message. 5
Display Message at End of Scanning
Displays a scan completion message.
Display Scan & Transfer Screens

Displays the transfer screen after scan completion. The scan completion message is not
displayed.
Display Message at End of Transfer

Displays a transfer completion message.
URL File Expiration

Generation of URL Link

Store & Send Link - Maximum File Size

Print Login Name on PDF Files

147
5 Tools
Email Service Settings
Folder Service Settings
Job Flow Service Settings
Stored File Settings

Tools
148
In [Network Controller Settings], you can set the type of interface through which the
print server is connected to the client in TCP/IP, and the parameters required for
communications.
Note This option may not be selectable depending on the print server installed.

Set the parameters required for communications.
1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Network Controller Settings] >
[Connectivty & Network Setup].
2 Select the item to be set or changed, and

Tools
3 Select the setting value.
4 Select [Save]. 5
Ethernet Rated Speed
Set the Ethernet setting for the print server. Select [Auto] if your network environment is
mixed or if you do not know the network speed. If you know the speed of the network to which
the print server is attached, select it. If your network is 100Base-T, select [Auto].
TCP/IP - IP Address Resolution

Select the procedure for setting the IP address on the print server.
Select one of the following settings.
DHCP
The IP address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway address are automatically extracted from the
DHCP server.
BOOTP
The IP address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway address are automatically extracted from the
BOOTP server.
STATIC
Allows you to manually enter the IP address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway address.
TCP/IP - IP Address
This option is only available if you have selected [Manual] from the previous option.
Enter the IP address from the Control Panel Numeric Keypad and then click [Next].
You must change the default to a valid address for your network.
Note Enter the IP address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx". The "xxx" should be a numeric value in
the range from 0 to 255. However, the range between 224.XXX.XXX.XXX through
255.XXX.XXX.XXX, and 127.XXX.XXX.XXX cannot be set.
If you make an entry mistake, press the <C> (Clear) button and enter the correct number.
To move to the next value without entering all 3 digits, select [Next].
149
5 Tools
TCP/IP - Subnet Mask

This option lets you modify the subnet mask for printing with TCP/IP over Ethernet.
Specify the subnet mask by a combination of the numbers 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252,
254, and 255. However, you cannot use 0 between non-zero values.
If you do not want to set the gateway address, enter "0.0.0.0".
TCP/IP - Gateway Address

Use this option to set the gateway address for printing with TCP/IP. If your network uses a
gateway, you must change the default to a correct gateway address for your network.
If you do not want to set the gateway address, enter "0.0.0.0".
Frame Type
Select [Auto] if your network environment is mixed or if you do not know the frame type of the
network. If you know the frame type of the network to which the print server is attached,
Tools
select it.
150
Setup
Setup
In [Setup], you can register or update Stored Programming and paper tray settings.
Create Folder ............................................................................................................................ 151
Stored Programming ................................................................................................................ 151
Create Job Flow Sheet.............................................................................................................. 151
Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword.............................................................................................. 151
Add Address Book Entry ......................................................................................................... 151
Paper Tray Attributes ............................................................................................................... 151
1 On the [Tools] screen, select [Setup].

Tools
Create Folder
This feature cannot be used on this machine. 5
Stored Programming
The Stored Programming feature enables you to register frequently used settings and record a
series of operations.
For more information on operation, refer to "5 Stored Programming" > "Registering/Deleting/Renaming
Stored Programs" in the User Guide.
Create Job Flow Sheet

Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword

Add Address Book Entry

Paper Tray Attributes

Set a paper size and a paper type load in each tray.
For more information, refer to "Paper Tray Attributes" (P.113).
151
5 Tools
Accounting
In [Accounting], you can register the users that will use the machine, and set the
operation settings of the Accounting feature.
For more information about this feature, refer to "Authentication and Accounting Features" (P.167).
Create/View User Accounts......................................................................................................152
Reset User Accounts .................................................................................................................154
System Administrators Meter (Copy Jobs)..............................................................................155
Accounting Type.......................................................................................................................155
Accounting Login Screen Settings............................................................................................156
Accounting/Billing Device Settings..........................................................................................156
1 On the [Tools] screen, select [Accounting].


Tools
Create/View User Accounts

5 To enable the Accounting feature, register user IDs and user names to authenticate
registered users.
You can set a limit on the number of pages for each user of the machine. You can also
check the cumulative number of pages for each user registered. Up to 1,000 user data
can be registered. The settings described here are identical with [Create/View User
Accounts] under [Authentication] of [Authentication/Security Settings].
Important Before registering users, refer to "Accounting Type" (P.155) and set the Accounting Type
you use.
1 Select [Create/View User Accounts].

2 Select a [User ID] for which you want to
register a user, and then select [Create/
Delete].
Note A 4-digit number displayed on the left of
each User ID is a user control number.
Selecting a line displayed as
[<Available>] displays a screen to enter
User ID. Enter a User ID, and then select
[Save].
Select [ ] to display the previous screen or [ ] to display the next screen.
Entering a 4-digit User ID number with the numeric keypad displays the specified number at
the top of the column.
3 Select any item, and set it.
4 Select [Close].
152
Accounting
User ID
Enter a user ID to use the machine. Up to 32 single-byte characters are allowed.
User Name
Set a user name. Up to 32 single-byte characters are allowed.
Passcode
Set a passcode. Setting a passcode is strongly recommended for security. Set a passcode
from 4 to 12 digits.
Note When [Passcode Entry from Control Panel] is set to [On], a passcode entry is required upon
user authentication.
E-mail Address
Account Limit
You can place restrictions on the use and the maximum number of allowed pages for each of
the Copy and Scan features.
Tools
1 Select [Account Limit].
2 Select a feature to restrict.
5
3 To set account limits, select [Change Account Limit], and then enter the maximum
number of pages with the numeric keypad.
Feature Access
Place access restrictions on features.
z Free Access
The feature is not restricted.
z Black & White Only
Only copying or scanning in black and white mode is allowed.
z
Color Only
Only copying or scanning in full, dual, and single color modes is allowed.
z No Access to Copy/Scan Service
Allows you to restrict the use of the Copy or Scan service.
Change Account Limit

Set the maximum number of pages for copying or scanning.
You can specify a number from 1 to 9,999,999 (7 digits) sheets in 1 sheet increments.
z The following limits can be placed on the Copy service for each user:
Permission to use: [Free Access], [Black & White Only], [Color Only], or [No Access to Copy
Service]
Maximum number of color pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999
Maximum number of black-and-white pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999
153
5 Tools
z The following limits can be placed on the Scan service for each user:
Permission to use: [Free Access], [Black & White Only], [Color Only], or [No Access to Scan
Service]
Maximum number of color pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999
Maximum number of black-and-white pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999
User Role
User Role
Allows you to select a user role for a user.
z
User
No special authority is given to this user role.
z
System Administrator
The System Administrators privileges are given to the user.
However, the following are not authorized.
- Change the passcode of the System Administrator
z
Account Administrator
The following authorities are given to the user.
- Register/delete/change/view user information
- Register/delete/change/view accounting information
- Change the authentication mode (However, this is not allowed when the machine is in the
Local Authentication mode). Change the [Alternative Name for User ID] and [Mask ID (***)]
Tools
settings.
- Print an Auditron Report for each user
5 Add This User To Authorization Group

Allows you to select an authorization group for a user.
Reset Account
Deletes all registered information for a selected user.
Reset
Deletes the registered user data. Once deleted, the data cannot be restored.
Cancel
Cancels the deletion of the user data.
Reset Total Impressions

Resets the current cumulative number of pages for a selected user, returning it to zero.
Reset
Resets the current cumulative number of pages for users. Once reset, the previous count
cannot be restored.
Cancel
Cancels resetting the cumulative number of pages.
Reset User Accounts

You can delete all registered information for all registered users in a single operation,
or reset the auditron data. It is also available to print contents for confirmation before
resetting. The settings described here are identical with [Reset User Accounts] under
[Authentication] of [Authentication/Security Settings].
All User Accounts
Deletes all information registered for each user. It also deletes all data including the maximum
number of pages, cumulative number of pages, and printer auditron data.
154
Accounting
All Feature Access Settings

Resets the feature access limit for all users.
All Account Limits

Resets the maximum number of pages for all users to the default (9,999,999 pages).
Total Impressions
Resets all accounting data for all users including the system administrator. The number of
pages is also reset to 0.
All Authorization Groups

Delinks users from authorization groups, and links those users to the default authorization
group.
Meter (Print Jobs)

Resets all printer auditron, and deletes automatically registered job owner names. The
number of pages printed is also reset to 0.
Note [Meter (Print Jobs)] is displayed when [Disable Accounting] is selected for [Print Service] in
the [Auditron Mode] screen under [Accounting Type].
Print the Meter Report

Prints a meter report, which is helpful when you check counters before you reset or delete
them.
Note [Meter (Print Jobs)] is displayed when [Disable Accounting] is selected for [Print Service] in
Tools
the [Auditron Mode] screen under [Accounting Type].
Print the Auditron Report

Prints a report including contents registered information to reset or a report including contents
administration data to reset.
5
The report is available for confirmation before resetting.
Reset
Deletes or resets the data for the selected item.
System Administrators Meter (Copy Jobs)

You can check or reset the total impression copied using the System Administration
mode on the screen.
The total impressions are counted up to 9,999,999 pages.
Accounting Type
You can select whether or not to use the Accounting feature.
Accounting Disabled
Does not perform accounting.
Local Accounting
Performs accounting. [Local Accounting] is automatically set for [Accounting Type] when
[Login Type] of [Authentication] is set to [Login to Local Accounts].
For more information, refer to "Login Type" (P.159).
Xerox Standard Accounting

155
5 Tools
Auditron Mode
Allows you to set whether or not to enable the Auditron feature for Copy and Network
Scanning services.
Note The services displayed on the screen depend on the machine configuration.
Accounting Login Screen Settings

You can configure Accounting settings.
Alternative Name for User ID

If required, you can change the indication "UserID" on the [Login] screen that appears when
the <Log In/Out> button on the control panel or the login information area on the touch screen
is pressed to another name such as "User Name" or "Number". The alias can be set to 1 to 15
single-byte characters.
Note The name changed is also printed in a report or a list.
Mask User ID (***)

You can set how an entered user ID is shown on the screen. Use this feature to enhance
security as required.
Tools
Show
As you enter the user ID, the characters are echoed on the screen in the normal way.
5 Hide
As you enter the user ID, the character string is hidden as a row of asterisks ().
Accounting/Billing Device Settings

You can configure accounting or billing device settings.
Important When an accounting or billing device is connected to the machine, be sure to set a password
and that users other than the system administrator do not disconnect the device by mistake.
The features described in this section may not appear for some models. Optional
components or related products provided by Fuji Xerox are required to use the features. For
more information, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
Connect with Accounting/Billing Device

Allows you to select whether or not to use the connected accounting or billing device from
[None] or [Connected].
Note While a device for maintenance is connected, you cannot change the setting.
Accounting/Billing Device
Select the type of the accounting/billing device connected to the machine.
Important If a device connected does not match the device selected in [Accounting/Billing Device], an
error occurs. Jobs related to the accounting/billing device cannot be performed until the error
is resolved. For information on how to resolve the error, refer to "Error Code" (P.195).
Track Print Jobs

The feature is effective for the Print service.
Select whether or not to track billing information for the print jobs. Select from [No Tracking]
and [Track with Accounting/Billing Device].
This feature is available for all accounting/billing devices.
156
Accounting
Track Scan Jobs

The feature is effective for the Scan service.
Select whether or not to track billing information for the scan jobs. Select from [No Tracking]
and [Track with Accounting/Billing Device].
This feature is available for accounting/billing devices other than Coin Kit and Dispenser.
Interrupt Mode
The feature is effective for the Copy service.
Select whether or not to enable the Interrupt mode. Select from [Disabled] and [Enabled].
This feature is available for accounting/billing devices other than Card Activated - Cumulative
and Smart Card Reader.
Job with Insufficient Credit

The feature is effective for the Copy, Print, and Scan services.
Select the operation of the machine when the amount remaining in the accounting/billing
device becomes insufficient. Select from [Delete Job Immediately] and [Hold Job].
This feature is available for accounting/billing devices other than Card Activated - Cumulative
and Smart Card Reader.
Charge Print Jobs
Tools
The feature is effective for the Print service.
Select how the print job performed is charged. Select from [Charge by Card Number] and [Do
not Charge by Card Number].
This feature is available for Card Activated - Cumulative and Card Activated - Subtractive.
5
Track with Cumulative Device
The feature is effective for the Copy and Print services.
Select the timing that the amount for copy or print job is charged. Select from [Track with
Accounting Device] and [High Speed Printing].
This feature is available for Card Activated - Cumulative.
Scan Ahead for Copy Job

The feature is effective for the Copy service.
Select whether or not to enable the Scan Ahead feature for copy jobs. Select from [Disabled]
and [Enabled].
This feature is available for Card Activated - Cumulative, Card Activated - Subtractive,
CoinKit, Dispenser, and Smart Card Reader.
Important Some of the products listed above may not be available for this feature depending on the
types and settings. For information on the products available for this feature and on how to
change the settings, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
157
5 Tools
In [Authentication/Security Settings], you can configure the registration and

authentication of a user and security settings.
For more information about the feature, refer to "Authentication and Accounting Features" (P.167).
System Administrator Settings..................................................................................................158
Authentication...........................................................................................................................159
Allow User to Disable Active Settings .....................................................................................163
Job Status Default .....................................................................................................................163
Overwrite Hard Disk.................................................................................................................164
1 On the [Tools] screen, select [Authentication/Security Settings].


Tools
System Administrator Settings

In [System Administrator Settings], you can set the system administrator ID and
5 passcode.
We recommend setting the system administrator ID and passcode to prevent
unauthorized setting changes and ensure security.
System Administrators Login ID

Set the system administrators user ID. Enter the ID from 1 to 32 single-byte characters.
Note The default of the system administrators user ID is 11111.
1 Select [System Administrators Login ID].

2 Select [On].
3 Select [Keyboard].
4 Enter the system administrators ID with up
to 32 characters, and then select [Save].
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to re-enter the same
system administrators ID in [Re-enter
System Administrator's Login ID].
6 Select [Save].
7 A confirmation window appears. Select [Yes] to confirm your entry.
System Administrators Passcode

Set the passcode for the System Administrator.
Setting a passcode is strongly recommended to enhance security.
Note The default of the system administrators passcode is x-admin.
The system administrators passcode set here is used when [Passcode Entry from Control
Panel] is set to [On] under [Authentication/Security Settings] > [Passcode Policy].
Set the passcode after setting the system administrators user ID. You can set the passcode
from 4 to 12 characters.
158
For more information about Passcode Entry from Control Panel, refer to "Passcode Policy" (P.162).
1 Select [System Administrators Passcode].

2 Select [New Passcode].
3 Enter a new passcode (4 to 12 digits) using
the keyboard displayed, and then select
[Save].
Note If no passcode is set, leave the text boxes
blank and select [Save].
4 Select [Retype Passcode], enter the same
passcode, and then select [Save].
5 Select [Save].
6 A confirmation window appears. Select [Yes] to confirm your entry.
Authentication
In [Authentication], you can set the following items.
Tools
Login Type ............................................................................................................................... 159
Access Control ......................................................................................................................... 159
Create/View User Accounts ..................................................................................................... 160
5
Reset User Accounts ................................................................................................................ 161
Create Authorization Groups ................................................................................................... 161
User Details Setup.................................................................................................................... 161
Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator.............................................................. 162
Passcode Policy ........................................................................................................................ 162
Charge/Private Print Settings ................................................................................................... 162
Login Type
Allows you to select a type of authentication.
No Login Required
Does not use the Authentication feature.
Login to Local Accounts

Authenticates users based on the user information registered on the machine.
To enable printing via a print server when [Login to Local Accounts] is selected, set [Print
Service] in [Auditron Mode] to [Disable Accounting].
Note When [Login to Local Accounts] is selected, the machine enters the Login mode and [Login]
is displayed at the lower left of the [Services Home] screen.
Login to Remote Accounts

Access Control
Allows you to restrict access to the machine or each service. Once the access control
is enabled, user authentication is required to use the machine or the services.
159
5 Tools
Device Access
Allows you to restrict buttons operation on the control panel of the machine.
Select [Unlocked] or [Locked].
Service Access
Allows you to restrict access to each of the following services.
Note When [Locked (Show Icon)] is selected for a service, [ ] is displayed on the button of the
applicable service on the [Services Home] screen. Also, [ : Requires Login] is displayed at
the lower left of the [Services Home] screen. [ ] and [ : Requires Login] are not displayed
after authentication.
When [Locked (Hide Icon)] is selected for a service, the applicable service is not displayed
on the [Services Home] screen. The services is displayed after authentication.
For more information on how to set the login type, refer to "Login Type" (P.159).
z
Copy
Restricts access to the Copy service on the machine.
If a stored programming contains steps to use the Copy service, the use of the store
programming is also restricted.
z
Store to Folder
z
E-mail
Tools
z
Scan
Restricts access to the Network Scanning services and features on the machine.
If a stored programming contains steps to use the Scan services, the use of the store
5 programming is also restricted.
z Scan to PC
z
Store & Send Link
z
Send from Folder
z Stored Programming
Restricts access to the Stored Programming service on the machine.
z
Job Flow Sheets
z
Print
Feature Access
Only [Color Copying] can be used on this machine. When [Copy] for [Service Access] is set to
[Unlocked], you can restrict the use of the color copying feature with this setting.
Create/View User Accounts

To enable the Accounting feature, register user IDs and user names to authenticate
registered users.
You can set a limit on the number of pages for each user of the machine. You can also
check the cumulative number of pages for each user registered. Up to 1,000 user data
can be registered. The settings described here are identical with [Create/View User
Accounts] under [Accounting].
Refer to "Create/View User Accounts" (P.152).
160
Reset User Accounts

You can delete all registered information for all registered users in a single operation,
or reset the auditron data. It is also available to print contents for confirmation before
resetting. The settings described here are identical with [Reset User Accounts] under
[Accounting].
Refer to "Reset User Accounts" (P.154).
Create Authorization Groups

System administrators can give login users authority to use some features that are
restricted for login users. The login users can be divided into different authorization
groups.
Note Up to 20 groups can be registered.
1 Select [Create Authorization Groups].

2 Select [Group Name], and then select
[Create/Delete].
3 Select and set any item.
Tools
5
Group Name
Enter a group name with up to 32 single-byte characters.
Restrict Recipient Selection Method

Restrict User to Edit Address Book

Allow User to Disable Active Settings

Select whether or not to permit the group members to temporarily disable the forcible printing
features, such as the Force Watermark, Print Universal Unique ID, and Force Annotation
features, and to allow the machine to process a job.
User Details Setup

Set the information required when carrying out authentication.
Alternative Name for User ID
If required, you can change the indication "UserID" on the [Login] screen that appears when
the <Log In/Out> button on the control panel is pressed to another name such as "User
Name" or "Number". The alias can be set to 1 to 15 single-byte characters.
Note The name changed is also printed in a report or a list.
Mask User ID (***)

You can set how an entered user ID is shown on the screen. Use this feature to enhance
security as required.
When you select [Show], the characters you enter are echoed on the screen in the normal
way as you enter the user ID. When you select [Hide], the characters you enter is hidden as a
row of asterisks (*****) as you enter the user ID.
161
5 Tools
Failed Access Log

Set the failure count to detect unauthorized access. An error is logged if authentication fails
the number of times specified here within a predetermined time (10 minutes).
Logout Confirmation Screen

Set whether or not to display a logout confirmation screen every time a user session ends.
User ID for Login

Set whether or not to make the user ID entry field on the user login screen case-sensitive.
When you select [Case Sensitive], authentication is performed using the User ID as
registered (including upper and lower cases). When you select [Non-Case Sensitive],
authentication is performed with case ignored even if the User ID has both upper and lower
cases.
Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator

This feature protects the settings from being changed by someone impersonating your
system administrator. If authentication for a system administrators ID fails more than
specified times continuously, access is denied.
You can specify a login attempt count from 1 to 10.
Note The failure count is reset when the machine is restarted.
To cancel the access rejection state, restart the machine by switching off and on the power.
Tools
Passcode Policy
Passcode Entry from Control Panel
5 You can set whether a passcode is required when the system administrator or a user uses
the machine. Selecting [On] enables [System Administrators Passcode] setting and
[Passcode] setting for [Create/View User Accounts].
Selecting [Off] does not require the passcode, even if a passcode is set in the above settings.
Important The setting of [Passcode Entry from Control Panel] is used for authentication on the
machine. Depending on authentication procedures, a passcode may be required for other
processes as well.
Minimum Passcode Length

Set this item when you specify the minimum number of digits allowed for a passcode.
Set a value from 4 to 12 in 1 digit increments.
Note This is only applicable to login users (not applicable to the system administrator and guests).
Registered users can be authenticated with a passcode less than the minimum number of
digits.
Charge/Private Print Settings

162

Use this feature when you want use active settings for most jobs but not for specific
jobs.
You can temporarily disable active settings such as Force Watermark, Print Universal
Unique ID, and Force Annotation features that have been enabled.
This feature is applicable to Copy when [Enable Active Settings] is selected (for jobs
such as Report, you cannot disable active settings).
This option is displayed when [Enable Active Settings] is selected for [Allow User to
Disable Active Settings] for the authorization group where the login user belongs.
Note If this setting is set to [Enable Active Settings] while a job is in progress, the setting is not
effective for the job.
You can disable active settings even when you select a file in a folder using the Job Flow
feature and manually execute a job.
Users with system administrator role can configure this feature regardless of authorization
group.
The Watermark feature specified by user using TrustMarkingBasic (purchase separately) or
copy are not disabled.
For more information about Force Watermark, refer to "Watermark" (P.122).
For more information about Print Universal Unique ID, refer to "Print Universal Unique ID" (P.124).
Tools
For settings of authorization group, refer to "Authentication and Accounting Features" (P.167).
Job Status Default 5

You can hide active jobs, completed jobs, and job logs from unauthenticated users or
non-job owners, to protect privacy and prevent leakage of confidential information.
Note If you set to hide job details, you cannot stop or delete jobs you instructed. Therefore, you
cannot cancel jobs in the case of operational error of copies or wrong transmission of faxes.
Active Jobs View

Select whether or not to hide active jobs from local users.
Completed Jobs View

Select from [All Job Viewing at All Times], [Require Login to View Jobs], and [No Job Viewing].
Access To
This feature is displayed when [Require Login to View Jobs] is selected.
Select either [All Jobs] or [Jobs Run By Login User Only].
Hide Job Details

This feature is displayed when [Allow Job Viewing at All Times] or [Require Login to View
Jobs] is selected.
Select either [No] or [Yes].
163
5 Tools
Overwrite Hard Disk

Select whether or not to conduct hard disk overwriting.
When copy processing is completed, the data is deleted from the hard disk and the area on
which the deleted data was stored is automatically overwritten with blank data. This feature
prevents unauthorized retrieval or restoration of the data recorded on the hard disk. It also
applies to copy document and other information stored temporarily by the system.
The following option can be configured.
Number of Overwrites
You can select the number of overwrites either once or three times.
Important If the machine is turned off during the overwriting, unfinished files may remain on the hard
disk. The overwriting will resume if you turn the machine on again with the unfinished files
remaining on the hard disk.
Overwriting once erases the data, but overwriting three times makes it even more definite
that the data cannot be restored. It does, however, take longer.
During overwriting, normal operations may be slowed down.
For more information on how to check the status during overwriting, refer to "Overwrite Hard Disk"
(P.91).
Tools
Prerequisite for Using the Data Security Feature
5 The system administrator must follow the instructions below:

z To protect the data deleted from or stored on the hard disk, the following settings are
required:
- Number of Overwrites: [1 Overwrite] or [3 Overwrites]
- Data Encryption: [On]: an encryption key of 12 digits
- Service Representative Restricted Operation: [Yes]
z Change the system administrators factory default passcode (x-admin). Register a new
passcode of 7 characters or more (maximum 12 characters). Be careful not to register a
passcode that can be easily assumed and not to store the registered passcode on a location
that is easily accessible to other persons.
Important If the system administrators user ID and passcode are forgotten, the machine configuration
will not be able to recover in case of malfunction.
z Set [Passcode Entry from Control Panel] to [On].
z Set [Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator] to 5 times.
z
Note that the hard disk security will not be warranted if you do not correctly follow the above
setting instructions.
For more information on how to set data encryption, refer to "Data Encryption" (P.130).
For more information on how to set service representative restricted operation, refer to "Service Rep.
Restricted Operation" (P.131).
For more information on how to set passcode entry from control panel, refer to "Passcode Policy"
(P.162).
For more information on how to set the system administrator's user ID, refer to "System Administrators
Login ID" (P.158).
The manager (of the organization that this machine is used for) must follow the instructions
below:
z Assign an appropriate person as a system administrator and manage and train the person
properly.
z When turning off the machine, make sure no operation is running. Train the users to turn off
the machine after an active operation completes, if any.
164
z Note that the Data Security feature is used to protect deleted document data from being
recovered; it does not protect files stored in folders in the hard disk.
z
Install an anti-bugging device on the internal network that the machine is located on, and
perform the network settings properly to protect the machine from interceptions.
z
To block unauthorized access, install a firewall device between the external network and the
internal network that the machine is located on.
z Set the passcode and encryption key according to the following rules:
- Do not use easily assured character string
- Use both characters and numerics
For more information on encryption key, refer to "Encryption Key for Confidential Data" (P.130).
Tools
5
165
Tools 5 Tools
166
6 Authentication and
Accounting Features
The machine provides the Authentication feature to restrict the availability of

services for each feature and the Accounting feature to manage the use of each
feature based on the Login Type selected.
This chapter describes the settings to restrict the availability of services and to
manage account usage on the machine.
z
Overview of Authentication and Accounting Feature ................................168
z Authentication ........................................................................................... 170
z
Services Controlled by Authentication ......................................................173
z
Configuration for Authentication ...............................................................174
z Configuration for Account Administration ................................................. 177
6 Authentication and Accounting Features
Overview of Authentication and Accounting Feature
This section overviews the Authentication feature and the Accounting feature.
The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Overview of Authentication Feature.........................................................................................168
Overview of Accounting Feature..............................................................................................169
Authentication and Accounting Features
Overview of Authentication Feature
Types of Users
The users include the System Administrator, Login User, Unregistered User, and Local
User.
For more information about the feature, refer to "User Types Managed by Authentication Feature"
(P.170).
User Role/Authorization Group

Allows you to assign a user role and an authorization group to each user.
When you assign [System Administrator] in [User Role] to a user, for example, the user
has almost the same privileges as the System Administrator.
For more information about the feature, refer to "User Roles and Authorization Groups" (P.171).
Types of Authentication
6 [Login to Local Accounts] allows you to authenticate users based on the user
information registered with the machine.
For more information about the feature, refer to "Types of Authentication" (P.171).
Access Control
Allows you to prohibit the operation of the control panel buttons.
For more information, refer to "Device Access" (P.160).
Allows you to verify users when they access the Copy or Scan service.
For more information about the feature, refer to "Service Access" (P.160).
Allows you to limit use of color copying.
For more information about the feature, refer to "Feature Access" (P.160).
Account Limit for Each User

z Allows you to restrict access to each service and to set the maximum number of
pages allowed for the service per user.
For more information about the feature, refer to "Services Controlled by Authentication" (P.173).
168
Overview of Authentication and Accounting Feature
Overview of Accounting Feature
Accounting Type
The machine supports the Local account administration.
For more information, refer to "Types of Account Administration" (P.172).
Available Combinations of Login and Accounting Types

You can select the Login and Accounting Types individually, but some combinations
are not available.

For more information, refer to "Authentication and Accounting Relationship" (P.172).
169
Authentication
This section describes the Authentication feature used with the machine.
User Types Managed by Authentication Feature......................................................................170
User Roles and Authorization Groups ......................................................................................171
Types of Authentication............................................................................................................171
Types of Account Administration.............................................................................................172
Authentication and Accounting Relationship ...........................................................................172
User Types Managed by Authentication Feature

The following describes the types of users that can be managed with the Authentication
feature.
User information can be registered on the machine.
Types of User
Users are classified into the following four types. The Authentication feature restricts
operations according to the user type.
The System Administrator can register and change system settings to adapt to the
environment to be used.
6 A system administrator uses a specific user ID called a system administrators user ID.
To login as the system administrator, enter the system administrators user ID in the
user ID entry field on the screen.
Login User
A Login User is a user registered on the machine or a remote server.
To use restricted services, enter the user ID and passcode on the screen.
Note Users who are assigned as [System Administrator] in [User Role] have almost the same
privileges as the system administrator. For more information, refer to "User Roles and
Authorization Groups" (P.171).
Unregistered User
Unregistered User is a user not registered on the machine.
An unregistered user cannot use restricted services.
Local User
A user who does not login to the machine is called a Local User.
Sub User
You can associate sub users with a user ID of a login user in accordance with the
intended use. Up to 10 Sub User IDs can be associated with a User ID.
170
Authentication
User Roles and Authorization Groups

You can select a user role and an authorization group for each user when registering
a user on the machine.
User Roles
The following three user roles are available:
User

No special authority is given to this user role.
The same authority as a system administrator is given except for the following
operation:
z
Change the passcode of the System Administrator
Account Administrator
The following authorities are given:
z Create, delete, change (except for passcode), and view (unavailable depending on
some settings) user information
z
Create, delete, change, and view accounting information
z
Print an Auditron report for each user
Authorization Groups 6
The following setting can be configured for each authorization group.
For details on authorization groups, refer to "Create Authorization Groups" (P.161).

Allows you to set whether or not to permit the group members to disable active settings,
such as Force Watermark, and Print Universal Unique ID, during their user sessions.
For details on the Watermark and UUID settings, refer to "Watermark" (P.122) and "Print Universal
Unique ID" (P.124).
For information on how to temporarily disable active settings, refer to "Allow User to Disable Active
Settings" (P.163)
Types of Authentication
Authentication is carried out using user information registered on the machine.
The following authentication method is offered according to the registration condition
of the user information.
Local machine authentication (Login to Local Accounts)

Local machine authentication uses the user information registered on the machine to
manage authentication.
171
Types of Account Administration

The following describes the types of account administration (Accounting Type)
available on the machine.
Note Some Accounting Types may be grayed out and not selectable depending on the Login
Type selected. For more information, refer to "Authentication and Accounting Relationship"
(P.172).
Local Accounting
Local Accounting performs account administration on the machine.
In Local Accounting, account administration is performed using the login users

information registered on the machine. Also, accounting information is counted using
various counters automatically created for each user. To print auditron reports for each
user, you must be authenticated as the system administrator, a user with the System
Administrator user role, or a user with the Account Administrator user role.
For information on how to print reports, refer to "Print Reports" (P.87).
Authentication and Accounting Relationship

You can individually select Login and Accounting Types, and can combine them as
described in the following table.
Accounting Types
Accounting Disabled Local Accounting
6 No Login
Required
O*1 X
Login Types
Login to Local
X O*1
Accounts
O: Available
X: Not available
*1 Default
172
Services Controlled by Authentication
Services Controlled by Authentication
This section describes the features that are controlled by the Authentication feature.
The restricted features vary depending on how the machine is used.
Overview .................................................................................................................................. 173
Services Restricted by User ID Authentication........................................................................ 173

Overview
The services can be controlled as follows.
Some restrictions can be set for each user, and other restrictions can be set for the
machine as a whole.
For information on the restrictions that can be set for each user, refer to "Account Limit" (P.153), and
for information on the restrictions that can be set for the machine as a whole, refer to "Service Access"
(P.160).
Services Restricted by User ID Authentication

For User ID Authentication, the services restricted by authentication and account
administration differ depending on the combination of the Authentication and
Accounting modes.
When [Login Type] is [Login to Local Accounts] and [Accounting Type] is [Local 6
Accounting]
The following services are controlled.
Authentication *1 Restrictions per user

Per-user
Services Feature Account
User ID Usage Count
restrictions *2 Limit *3
Copy O O O O
Scan O O O O
Report/List - - - -
O: Available
X : Not available
*1 This column shows whether authentication is required for each service. "O" indicates that authentication is required.
*2 You can select features available for each user. For more information, refer to "Account Limit" (P.153).
*3 This feature stops machine operation when the number of pages specified in the account limit is processed. For
more information, refer to "Account Limit" (P.153).
173
Configuration for Authentication
This section describes the settings to use the Authentication feature on the machine.
Enabling Authentication ...........................................................................................................174
Changing the Default Authorization Group Settings................................................................175
Creating an Authorization Group..............................................................................................176
Enabling Authentication
When [Login to Local Accounts] is Selected

Perform the following procedures to use local authentication.

2 Enter the system administrators user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
6
3 Select [Tools] on the [Services Home] screen.
4 Select [Authentication/Security Settings].
5 Select [Authentication].
6 Select [Login Type].
7 Select [Login to Local Accounts], and then select [Save].
Note When [Login to Local Accounts] is selected, settings must be made to enable printing via a
print server. For details on how to make these settings, refer to "Login Type" (P.159).
For more information on the authentication method, refer to "Login Type" (P.159).
8 Select [Access Control].

9 Select [Service Access].
10 Select [Unlocked] for the required services to permit users unlimited access, and then
select [Save].
11 After you finish settings for each feature, select [Close].
12 To disable button operations on the control panel, select [Device Access] and select
[Locked], and then select [Save] and then [Close].
13 Select [Passcode Entry from Control Panel] under [Passcode Policy].
Select [On] to prompt users to enter their passcode, or select [Off] if the passcode
entry is not required, and then select [Save] and then [Close].
15 Select a user displayed as [<Available>], and then select [Create/Delete].
174
Configuration for Authentication
16 Enter a User ID and select [Save].

18 Configure the [Account Limit] and [Feature Access] settings for each service, and then
select [Close].
19 If necessary, select a user role and an authorization group for the user under [User
Role] and [Add This User To Authorization Group] respectively, and then select
[Save].

21 Select [Close].
Note Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message
displayed on the screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
The machine enters the Login mode, and [Login] is displayed at the lower left of the
[Services Home] screen.
When [Locked (Show Icon)] is selected for a service under [Service Access], [ ] is
displayed on the button of the applicable service on the [Services Home] screen. Also,
[ : Requires Login] is displayed at the lower left of the [Services Home] screen. [ ] and
[ : Requires Login] are not displayed after authentication.
When [Locked (Hide Icon)] is selected for a service under [Service Access] the applicable
service is not displayed on the [Services Home] screen. The services is displayed after
authentication.
Changing the Default Authorization Group Settings

Perform the following procedures to change the settings of the default authentication
6
group.
The settings changed here will be used as the default value of the authorization group
for a created user.


7 Select the group displayed as [DefaultGroup (Default)], and then select [Create/
Delete].
8 Set each item.
For more information on the change of the authorization group, refer to "Create Authorization Groups"
(P.161).
175
10 Select [Close].
Creating an Authorization Group

Perform the following procedures to add authorization groups, if necessary.


7 Select a group displayed as [(No Name)], and then select [Create/Delete].
8
6 Enter a group name into [Group Name].
9 Set the other items.
For more information on the authorization group settings, refer to "Create Authorization Groups"
(P.161).

11 Select [Close].
176
Configuration for Account Administration
Configuration for Account Administration
This section describes the settings to use the Accounting feature on the machine.
Step 1 Selecting an Accounting Type ...................................................................................... 177
Step 2 Registering User Information........................................................................................ 177

Step 1 Selecting an Accounting Type
The following describes the configuration procedures to use the Accounting feature.
Note For information on relationships between the Authentication and Accounting modes, refer to
"Authentication and Accounting Relationship" (P.172).

3 Select [Tools] on the [Services Home] screen. 6

4 Select [Accounting].
5 Select [Accounting Type].
6 Select an accounting type, and then select [Save].
Note The available option is [Local Accounting].
For information on the accounting types, refer to "Accounting Type" (P.155).

8 Select [Close].
Step 2 Registering User Information


4 Select [Accounting].
177

6 Select [<Available>], and then select [Create/Delete].
7 Enter a User ID and select [Save].
9 Configure the [Account Limit] and [Feature Access] settings for each service, and then
select [Save].
For more information on the account limit, refer to "Account Limit" (P.153).
10 If necessary, select a user role and an authorization group for the user under [User
Role], and then select [Save].
Note [User Role] is displayed only when [Login Type] is set to [Login to Local Accounts].
For more information on the user role, refer to "User Role" (P.154).

12 Select [Close].
178
7 Problem Solving
This chapter describes solutions to various problems you may have with the
machine.
z Troubleshooting ........................................................................................ 180
z
Machine Trouble .......................................................................................181
z
Image Quality Trouble ..............................................................................185
z Trouble during Copying ............................................................................191
z
Error Code ................................................................................................195
z
Paper Jams............................................................................................... 220
z Document Jams........................................................................................ 257
z
Stapler Faults............................................................................................ 260
z
Re-inserting the Staple Cartridge into the Cartridge Unit .........................267
z Correcting the Curl of Outputs (When Finisher D4 or Finisher D4 with Booklet
Maker is Installed).....................................................................................269
7 Problem Solving
Troubleshooting
This section describes troubles that may occur with the machine and their solutions.
Follow the troubleshooting procedure below to solve the problems.
The machine does not work Action Refer to "Machine Trouble" (P.181).
properly. Yes
No
A message is displayed. Cause Has a paper or document jam occurred?
No Yes Action For information on paper jams, refer to "Paper Jams"
(P.220).
For information on document jams, refer to "Document
Jams" (P.257).
No
Cause Is an error code displayed?
Action Refer to "Error Code" (P.195).
The image quality is poor. Action Refer to "Image Quality Trouble" (P.185).
Problem Solving
No Yes
Trouble during copying Action Refer to "Trouble during Copying" (P.191).
If the error is not resolved even after following the above procedure, contact your local
180
Machine Trouble
Machine Trouble
Before you conclude that the machine is defective, check the machine status again.
Symptom Cause Remedy

The machine is Is the main power and Switch the main power switch and power
not powered on. power switched on? on.
Refer to "2 Product Overview" in the User
Guide.
Is the power cord plugged Switch the main power switch and power
into the power outlet? off, and then firmly plug the power cord into
the connector of the machine and power
Is the power cord
outlet. Then switch the main power and
disconnected from the
power on.
machine or the back of the
rack? Refer to "2 Product Overview" in the User
Guide.
Does the AC outlet supply Connect another appliance to the outlet to
power properly? verify the power supply.
The <Error> The system of the machine Switch the main power and power off and
Problem Solving
indicator is or the components installed then on. If the error still is not resolved,
blinking. may have a trouble. contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
The <Error> Is paper or a document Remove the jammed paper or document.
indicator is lit. jammed? If paper is jammed, refer to "Paper Jams"
(P.220), and a document is jammed, refer to
Is the front cover or top

"Document Jams" (P.257).
Solve the problem by following the
7
cover open? message displayed.
The touch screen Is the <Energy Saver> The machine is in the Energy Saver mode.
is too dark. button lit? Press the <Energy Saver> button on the
control panel to exit the Energy Saver
mode.
Refer to "2 Product Overview" in the User
Guide.
Is the screen brightness too Adjust the screen brightness on the
low? [Screen Brightness] screen.
Refer to "Adjusting Screen Brightness" (P.21).
Unable to copy. Is a message displayed on Follow the instructions displayed to resolve
the touch screen? the problem.
Is the power cord Turn the power switch off, and then firmly
disconnected from the plug the power cord into the connector and
machine? power outlet. Then turn the power switch
on.
Refer to "2 Product Overview" > "Power
Source" in the User Guide.
Is the power breaker switch Turn on the power breaker switch.
on the side of Tray 6 (A4 Refer to "2 Product Overview" in the User
High Capacity Feeder) Guide.
turned off?
181
7 Problem Solving

A document is Is the specified size paper Follow the instructions displayed to load
not fed from Tray loaded in the tray? paper of correct size, and then try again.
5 (Bypass). Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass)"
(P.30).
Unable to insert Did you open a cover or turn Do not forcibly insert or remove the paper
or remove a the machine off during tray. Switch off the power. In a few
paper tray. printing? seconds, switch on the power. When the
machine is ready to receive data, insert or
remove the paper tray.
Unable to copy Is the document glass or the Clean the document glass and the
with the specified document cover dirty? document cover.
size. Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and
Document Glass" (P.77).
Is the document a Place the document on the document
transparent type such as a glass, and place a white sheet on top of
transparency film? the document when copying.
Is the document in the Load the document correctly.
correct position? Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in
Problem Solving
Is the document loaded the User Guide.

correctly?
Are the document guides on Adjust the document guide positions.
the document feeder set in Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in
the correct positions? the User Guide.
Is the document folded? Unfold and correctly load the document.
7 Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in
the User Guide.
Is the document a non- Specify the document size.
standard size? Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in
the User Guide.
182
Machine Trouble

Paper is often Is the paper loaded correctly Load the paper correctly.
jammed or in the tray? Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.27).
wrinkled.
Is the paper tray inserted Firmly push in the paper tray until it stops
correctly? to insert it correctly.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.27).
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new one.
Is the paper curled? Turn over the paper in the tray, or replace
the paper with new one.
Are the paper and paper Correctly set the paper and paper trays to
tray settings correct? correspond to the paper.
Refer to "Changing the Paper Settings" (P.47).
Are any torn pieces of paper Open the cover of the machine or slide out
remaining or is there a the paper tray to remove the torn pieces or
foreign object in the the foreign object.
machine? Refer to "Paper Jams" (P.220) or "Loading
Problem Solving
Paper" (P.27).
Is non-standard paper Replace with paper that meets machine
loaded in the tray? specifications.
Refer to "Paper Types" (P.24) or "Loading
Paper" (P.27).
Is paper exceeding the Load paper in the paper tray so that it does
maximum fill line in the tray? not exceed the maximum fill line.
7
Are the paper guides set Load the paper correctly, and align the
correctly? paper guides to the paper.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.27) or "Changing
the Paper Size" (P.40).
Is the image nearly the Increase the edge erase widths.
same size as the paper? For more information, refer to "3 Copy" in the
User Guide when copying.
Is the paper finely cut out? Some types of paper may not be cut out
finely. Load the paper after fanning it well.
A document is Is the document small? The minimum size of the document that
not fed into the can be loaded on the document feeder is
document 139.7 x 210 mm (A5, A5 , 5.5 x 8.5", 5.5 x
feeder. 8.5" ).
Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in
the User Guide.
An error Check the positions of the Adjust the paper guides to the correct
message paper guides of Tray 5. positions.
appears after Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass)"
paper is loaded (P.30).
in Tray 5 and the
<Start> button is
pressed.
183
7 Problem Solving

Documents are Are suitable types of Correctly load documents suitable for the
often jammed. documents being used? document feeder.
Are you trying to use Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in
irregular shaped the User Guide.
documents, business cards,
transparencies, or thin
documents?
Are you trying to use Remove sticky tags, paper clips or
documents with sticky tags, adhesive tape from the document before
paper clips or adhesive copying.
tape?
Are the document guides Adjust the document guide positions.
set in the correct positions? Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in
the User Guide.
Is a piece of torn paper Open the document feeder cover and
remaining in the document check inside.
feeder? Refer to "Document Jams" (P.257).
Is the [Mixed Size Originals] Set [Mixed Size Originals] to [On].
Problem Solving
setting set to [Off] when you Refer to "3 Copy" > "Layout Adjustment" >
copy originals of different "Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different
sizes? Size Documents Simultaneously)" in the User
Guide.
Is an A5 document loaded Load the A5 document in portrait
in landscape orientation orientation ( ).
7 ( ) on the document
feeder when [Mixed Size
Originals] is set to [On]?
An edge of the Is the document curled? Flatten the curl and load the document
document is again.
folded.
Cannot copy in Is [Output Color] set to Set [Output Color] to [Color].
color. [Black & White]? Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copy" > "Output Color
(Selecting the Color for Copying)" in the User
Guide.
Is a message displayed on Replace the toner cartridge of the color
the touch screen prompting indicated in the message.
you to replace the toner Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridges" (P.54).
cartridge?
Is a message displayed on Replace the drum cartridge indicated in the
the touch screen prompting message.
you to replace the drum Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges R2, R3,
cartridge? or R4 (For Customers Having a Time and
Material Contract)" (P.62).
Cannot staple Is staple jam occurred in the Remove the staple jammed in the
properly staple cartridge? cartridge.
Refer to "Stapler Faults" (P.260).
184
Image Quality Trouble
If the image quality of printed documents is poor, identify the symptom in the following
table to perform the remedy.
If image quality does not improve even after performing the remedy, contact your local

The copy is dirty. Is the document glass or the Clean the document glass and the
document cover dirty? document cover.
Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and
Is the document a If the document is transparent, dirt on the
transparent type such as a document cover will be copied. Place a
transparency film? white sheet of paper on top of the
document when copying.
Is the document colored, Adjust the copy density or image quality.
rough, or a blueprint? Refer to "3 Copy" > "Image Quality" in the
User Guide.
Problem Solving
Is the document glossy Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the
printing paper? document glass, and shadows are
sometimes copied, soiling the image.
Place a transparency film under the
The copy has Is the document glass on Clean the document glass.
black lines. the document feeder dirty? Refer to "Cleaning the Document Presser and
Narrow Glass Strip" (P.77).
7
The copy is too Is the copy density set to Adjust the copy density.
dark. [Darken]? Refer to "3 Copy" > "Image Quality" in the
The copy is too Is the document faint? User Guide.
light.
Is the copy density set to
[Lighten]?
The copy is Are the paper edges aligned Align the paper edges, adjust them to the
slightly and the leading edge tray's top corners, and reload the paper.
misaligned. adjusted to the tray Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.27).
corners?
185
7 Problem Solving

The copy is Is the document loaded Load the document correctly.
misaligned or correctly? Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in
skewed. the User Guide.
Is the paper loaded correctly Load the paper correctly.
in the tray? Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.27).
Are the paper guides of Load the paper correctly and align the
Tray 5 correctly aligned to document guides to the document edges.
the paper? Refer to "Changing the Paper Size" (P.40).
Are the document guides on Load the document correctly, and align the
the document feeder set in document guides to the document edges.
the correct positions? Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in
the User Guide.
Is the paper tray inserted Firmly push in the tray until it stops to
correctly? insert it properly.
Part of the image Is the paper damp? If the paper is damp, the copy image may
is missing on the be partially missing or unclear. Replace the
Problem Solving
copy. paper with new one.

Is folded or wrinkled paper Remove the unsuitable paper or replace all
included in the tray? of the paper with new one.
Is the document pasted or The pasted or folded section may not be
7 folded? laying flat on the document glass. Place a
stack of white sheets on top of the
document to flatten the document against
the document glass.
The copy has a Is the enlargement ratio too Vertical stripes may be printed on the
stripe pattern. large? copies depending on the ratio. Adjust the
ratio to eliminate the stripes.
Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copy" > "Reduce/Enlarge
(Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)" in the
User Guide.
Color shift of Is the color calibration Execute auto calibration.
color copies is incorrect? Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.79).
poor, resulting in
unsatisfactory Is the machine set where it If the document glass is exposed to strong
image quality. is exposed to direct light when you turn the machine on or
sunlight? cancel the Energy Saver mode, color shift
may occur. Close the document cover and
turn the machine on, and when the
machine becomes ready to copy or print,
turn the machine off and then on one more
time.
186

Printing is faint. The paper is damp. Replace the paper with new one.
(smudged, Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.27).
unclear)
The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge with a new
deteriorated or is damaged. one.
Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridge R1 (For
Customers Having a Time and Material
Contract)" (P.58) and "Replacing Drum
Cartridges R2, R3, or R4 (For Customers
Having a Time and Material Contract)" (P.62).
There is no toner left in the Replace the toner cartridge with a new
toner cartridge. one.
Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridges" (P.54).
Black dots are The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge with a new
printed. deteriorated or is damaged. one.
Problem Solving
Black or colored The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge with a new
lines are printed. deteriorated or is damaged. one.
Contract)" (P.58) and "Replacing Drum 7
The document glass on the Clean the document glass.
document feeder is dirty. Refer to "Cleaning the Document Presser and
Narrow Glass Strip" (P.77).
Dirt appears at The paper path is dirty. Print a few pages to remove the dirt.
equal intervals.
Contract)" (P.58) and"Replacing Drum
Paper feed direction
187
7 Problem Solving

White dots The paper is unsuitable. Load suitable paper.
appear in black Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.27).
filled areas.
Printed toner The paper is damp. Replace the paper with new one.
smudges when Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.27).
rubbed with your
finger. The paper is unsuitable. Load suitable paper.
Toner is not Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.27).
fused.
The paper is
soiled with toner.
Problem Solving
7
The entire paper The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge with a new
area is printed deteriorated or is damaged. one.
black. Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridge R1 (For
High-voltage power supply Contact your local Fuji Xerox
may have malfunctioned. representative.
Nothing is Two or more sheets of Fan the paper well and load it again.
printed. paper are being fed Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.27).
simultaneously (double-
feed).
No toner remains in the Replace the toner cartridge with a new
Power supply or high- Contact your local Fuji Xerox
voltage power supply may representative.
have malfunctioned.
188

White areas or The paper is damp. Replace the paper with new one.
white or colored Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.27).
stripes appear.
The paper is unsuitable. Load suitable paper.
The entire output Two or more sheets may be Fan the paper well and load it again.
is faint. fed simultaneously. Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.27).
Problem Solving
Paper becomes The paper is unsuitable. Replace the paper with new one.
wrinkled. Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.27).
Paper has been added to
the paper loaded.
The paper is damp.
7
Text is blurred. The paper is unsuitable. Replace the paper with new one.
Paper has been added to Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.27).
the paper loaded.
The paper is damp.
White or color The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge with a new
patches appear deteriorated or is damaged. one.
vertically. Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridge R1 (For
No toner remains in the Replace the toner cartridge with a new
Paper feed direction
189
7 Problem Solving

Text or images The paper guides in the Adjust the horizontal and vertical paper
are printed at an paper tray are not set in the guides to the correct positions.
angle. correct positions. Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.27).
Problem Solving
190
Trouble during Copying
This section describes how to resolve copy problems.
Unable to Copy
If you cannot copy a document, identify the symptom in the following table to perform
the remedy.

The document is The document is too small. The minimum size of document that can be
not correctly fed loaded on the document feeder is 139.7 x
from the 210 mm (A5, A5 , 5.5 x 8.5",
document 5.5 x 8.5" ).
feeder. Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in
the User Guide.
The document type is The document feeder does not feed
unsuitable. irregular sized documents, business cards,
Problem Solving
transparencies, or thin documents.
In addition, the document feeder does not
feed documents with sticky tags, paper
clips, or adhesive tape.
the User Guide.
The document guides are Adjust the document guides to the
set in incorrect positions. document.
7
the User Guide.
A piece of torn paper Open the document feeder cover, and
remains in the document remove the piece.
feeder Refer to "Document Jams" (P.257).
Documents of mixed sizes When loading documents of mixed sizes,
are loaded. be sure to set [Mixed Size Originals] to
[On]. Otherwise, a paper jam will occur.
Refer to "3 Copy" > "Layout Adjustment" >
"Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different
Size Documents Simultaneously)" in the User
Guide.
191
7 Problem Solving
The Copy Result is Not What was Expected

If the copy result is not what was expected, identify the symptom in the following table
to perform the remedy.

The copy is dirty. The document glass or the Clean the document glass or the document
document cover is soiled. cover.
Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and
The document is a If the document is transparent, dirt on the
transparent type such as a document cover may be copied. Place a
transparency film. white sheet of paper on top of the
The document is colored, The paper's background color is copied.
rough, or a blueprint. Adjust the copy density or image quality, or
specify [Suppress Background].
The document is glossy Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the
printing paper. document glass, and shadows are
sometimes copied, soiling the image.
Problem Solving
Place a transparency film under the

The copy is too The copy density is set to Adjust the copy density.
dark or light. [Darken] or [Lighten]. Refer to "3 Copy" > "Image Quality" in the
User Guide.
The document density is too Adjust the copy density.
7 light. Refer to "3 Copy" > "Image Quality" in the

User Guide.
The setting for [Original Copy black text. If the printout is too light,
Type] is inappropriate for select [Text] for [Original Type].
the document. Refer to "3 Copy" > "Image Quality" in the
User Guide.
The color of the Is the color calibration Execute auto calibration.
document and of incorrect? Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.79).
the copy differ.
The document type selected Set the suitable value for [Original Type].
is not suitable. Refer to "3 Copy" > "Image Quality" >
"Original Type (Selecting the Document
Type)" in the User Guide.
The image quality selected Copy black text. If the printout is too light,
is unsuitable for the select [Text] for [Original Type].
document. Refer to "3 Copy" > "Image Quality" in the
User Guide.
The copy is Paper is misaligned in the Align the paper edges, and adjust them to
slightly tray. the tray's top corners to reload the paper.
misaligned. Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.27).
192

Part of the image The paper is damp. If the paper is damp, the copy image may
is missing on the be partially missing or unclear. Replace the
copy. paper with new one.
Folded or wrinkled paper is Remove the unsuitable paper or replace all
included in the tray. of the paper with new one.
The document is pasted or The pasted or folded section may not be
folded. laying flat on the document glass. Place a
stack of white sheets on top of the
document to flatten the document against
the document glass.
The copy has a The document enlargement Vertical stripes may be printed on the
stripe pattern. ratio is too large. copies depending on the ratio. Adjust the
ratio to eliminate the stripes.
Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copy" > "Reduce/Enlarge
(Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)" in the
User Guide
Problem Solving
The copy is The document is not loaded Load the document correctly.
misaligned or correctly. Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in
skewed. the User Guide.
The document guides on Load the document correctly, and align the
the document feeder are not document guides to the document.
set in the correct positions. Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in
the User Guide.
The paper tray is not Firmly push in the tray until it stops to set it 7
inserted correctly. properly.
The paper guides in Tray 5 Load the document correctly, and align the
are not set in the correct document guides to the document edges.
positions. Refer to "Changing the Paper Size" (P.40).
193
7 Problem Solving

Unable to copy The document glass or the Clean the document glass or the document
with the specified document cover is dirty. cover.
size. Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and
The document is a Place a white sheet of paper on top of the
transparent type such as a document when copying.
transparency film.
The document is Load the document correctly.
misaligned. Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in
the User Guide.
The document guides on Load the document correctly, and align the
the document feeder are not document guides to the document.
set in the correct positions. Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in
the User Guide.
The document is a non- Specify the document size, and then copy.
standard size. Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in
the User Guide.
Problem Solving
The document is folded. Flatten the curl and load the document
again.
the User Guide.
Unable to copy in [Output Color] is set to Set [Output Color] to [Auto Detect] or
color. [Black & White]. [Color].
Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copy" > "Output Color
7 (Selecting the Color for Copying)" in the User
Guide.
The document The document is larger than Adjust [Reduce/Enlarge] to copy the
edges are the printable area. document smaller.
missing on the
copy.
Outputs are not The Finisher is not attached. The Finisher is required to staple. Install
stapled. the Finisher, or change the print option
settings to cancel stapling.
The number of pages to Reduce the number of pages.
stapled exceeds the Staple-enabled number of pages is 100 or
maximum number for less. For Z-folding, staple-enabled number
stapling. of pages is 10 or 5 sheets depending on
the size of the paper used. For a booklet,
up to 15 sheets can be stapled at once.
194
Error Code
Error Code
This section describes error codes.

An error message and error code (-) are displayed if printing terminated
abnormally because of an error, or a malfunction occurred in the machine.
Refer to the error codes in the following table to resolve problems.
Important If an error code is displayed, any print data remaining in the machine and information stored
in the machine's memory is not secured.
If an error code is displayed that is not listed in the following table, or if you cannot
resolve an error despite following the instructions described in the table, contact your
local Fuji Xerox representative. The contact number is printed on the label or card
attached to the machine.
Error Code Cause and Remedy

002-770 [Cause] Unable to process job template due to insufficient hard disk space.
[Remedy] Remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to increase free disk space.
003-311 [Cause] An error occurred.
Problem Solving
003-318 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then
switch on the machine power. If the same message is displayed again, contact
003-319
003-320
003-321
003-322
003-323
003-324
003-325 7
003-326
003-327
003-328
003-329
003-330
003-331
003-332
003-333
003-334
003-335
003-336
003-337
003-338
003-339
003-340
003-341
003-342
003-343
003-344
003-345
003-346
* If you cannot resolve an error despite following the instructions described in the table, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative. The contact number is printed on the label or card attached on the machine.
195
7 Problem Solving

003-700 [Cause] Too many documents are set in the document feeder after clearing the paper jam.
[Remedy] Check the output, and then replace the documents that have not been copied yet.
003-701 [Cause] A digital code is embedded in the document to restrict duplication.
[Remedy] Use a document in which no digital code is embedded.
003-702 [Cause] When copying both sides of a document, the [Reduce/Enlarge] setting for side 1
and side 2 differ.
[Remedy] Make sure that the settings are the same for both sides of the document.
003-703 [Cause] Unable to detect the calibration chart for color scanning.
[Remedy] Set the calibration chart correctly.
003-704 [Cause] An abnormal calibration pattern for color scanning was detected. There may be a
malfunction with the machine.
[Remedy] If the problem is not resolved even after trying calibration again, contact your local
003-705 [Cause] When changing the paper size for the tray loaded with paper during Energy Saver
mode, a copy job was started before the machine was able to detect the change in
paper size after recovering from Energy Saver mode.
[Remedy] Cancel copying and perform the copy procedure again.
003-750 [Cause] Unable to store any documents using the 2 Sided Book Copying feature.
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Check the 2 Sided Book Copying settings.

Refer to "3 Copy" > "Layout Adjustment" in the User Guide.
003-751 [Cause] Unable to process the document because the specified scan area is too small.
[Remedy] Increase the resolution or scan area.
003-752 [Cause] A mix sized document was to be scanned at 600 dpi in Color/2 sided.
[Remedy] Set [Resolution] to [400dpi] or lower, and try scanning again.
7 003-753 [Cause] A mix sized document was to be scanned at high resolution, 2 sided.
[Remedy] Set [Resolution] to [200dpi], and scan the document again.
003-754 [Cause] An error occurred in the document feeder.
003-755 [Remedy] Execute the job again.
003-757 [Cause] A mix sized document was to be scanned at high resolution, 2 sided.
[Remedy] Set [Resolution] to [300dpi] or lower, and scan the document again.
003-760 [Cause] An incompatible combination of feature is specified for document scan conditions.
[Remedy] Confirm the selected options.
003-761 [Cause] The paper size of the tray selected for auto tray differs from the paper size of the
tray selected for Auto Paper selection.
[Remedy] Change the paper size for the tray, or change the [Paper Type Priority] settings.
003-763 [Cause] An error occurred when reading the Calibration Chart.
[Remedy] Place the Calibration Chart correctly on the document glass.
Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.79).
003-780 [Cause] Failed to compress the scanned document.
[Remedy] Reduce the resolution or the ratio for [Reduce/Enlarge] to decrease the data size,
or split the data to send it separately.
003-795 [Cause] When enlarging/reducing a scanned document to the paper size specified, the
reduction/enlargement ratio exceeds the allowed range.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z Manually enter a reduction/enlargement ratio.
z Change the paper size.
196
Error Code

[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then
switch on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact your local
005-281
005-282
005-283
005-284
Problem Solving
010-322
010-323
010-324
7
010-328
010-357
012-113 [Cause] Booklet Maker malfunction
012-114 [Remedy] Follow the instructions displayed on the touch screen and remove the remaining
paper.
012-115
012-180
197
7 Problem Solving

012-211 [Cause] Finisher malfunction
012-213
012-214
012-215
012-216
012-217
012-218
012-219
012-247
012-223
012-221
012-236
012-235
012-237
012-238
012-239
012-240
Problem Solving
012-255
012-260
012-282
012-291
012-225 [Cause] Booklet Maker malfunction
7 012-227 switch on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact your local
012-229
012-230
012-241
012-243
012-246
012-265
012-264 [Cause] The Booklet Maker is not fully inserted completely into the Finisher.
[Remedy] Completely insert the Booklet Maker into the Finisher, and turn the machine off
and then on.
012-250 [Cause] Folding Unit malfunction
012-252
012-253
012-911 [Cause] The sensor was activated because paper output to the finisher was removed before
the finisher tray lowered and completely stopped in position. Or, there is a foreign
object under the finisher tray.
[Remedy] If there is any foreign object under the finisher tray, remove it and then turn the
machine off and on. If the error persists, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
198
Error Code

012-248 [Cause] Finisher Tray malfunction
012-254 [Cause] Folding Unit malfunction
012-320 [Cause] An error occurred in the finisher.
012-322
012-323
012-324
012-325
012-330
012-332
012-335
112-963 [Cause] The staple waste container for the finisher is almost full.
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Replace the staple waste container.
016-210 [Cause] An error occurred in the software.
016-212
016-213
016-214
016-215 7
016-216
016-217
016-219
016-222
016-223
016-224
016-225
016-226
016-227
016-228
016-229 [Cause] An error occurred in the software
016-233 [Cause] An error occurred in the software
199
7 Problem Solving

016-312
016-313
016-314
016-315
016-316
016-317
016-318
016-319
016-320
016-321
016-322
016-323
Problem Solving
016-325
016-326
016-332
7 016-335
016-336
[Cause] An error occurred.
016-337
016-338
016-339
016-340
016-341
016-342
200
Error Code

016-348
016-350
016-351
016-360
016-362
016-363
016-364
016-365
016-366
016-367
016-368
016-369
016-370
016-371
Problem Solving
016-501
016-502
016-708 [Cause] Unable to annotate because of insufficient hard disk space.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data from the hard disk to free up disk space.
016-722 [Cause] The staple position specified is not supported by the machine, or the paper size
specified is not supported by the finisher.
[Remedy] Confirm the staple position and the paper size, and try printing again.
7
016-723 [Cause] The punch position specified is not supported by the machine, or the paper size
specified is not supported by the finisher.
[Remedy] Confirm the punch position and the paper size, and try printing again.
016-724 [Cause] The specified staple and punch position combination is unsupported.
[Remedy] Specify the staple and punch positions on the same side, and try printing again.
016-735 [Cause] Attempted to print [Job Template List] while updating the job template.
[Remedy] Retry printing after waiting for a period of time.
016-747 [Cause] The memory became insufficient when using the Repeat Image feature and the
Annotations features simultaneously.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z
Increase the annotation image size.
z
Reduce the usage of Repeat Image.
z
Increase memory.
016-756 [Cause] Do not have permission to use the service.
[Remedy] Consult your system administrator.
016-757 [Cause] The passcode is incorrect.
[Remedy] Enter the correct passcode.
016-758 [Cause] The division does not have permission to use the service.
016-759 [Cause] The number of pages reached the maximum number of pages for this service.
201
7 Problem Solving

016-774 [Cause] Unable to process compression conversion because of insufficient hard disk
space.
016-775 [Cause] Unable to process image conversion because of insufficient hard disk space.
016-777 [Cause] A hard disk error occurred during image processing.
[Remedy] The hard disk may be defective. To replace the hard disk, contact your local Fuji
016-778 [Cause] The conversion processing of the scanned image was interrupted because of
insufficient disk space.
016-779 [Cause] An error occurred during scanned image conversion processing.
[Remedy] Retry scanning. If using large-size paper such as A3 with [Resolution] set to [600
dpi], specify [Resolution] to [400 dpi] or lower in [Layout Adjustment]. If the error
still is not resolved, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
016-780 [Cause] A hard disk error occurred during scanned image conversion processing.
[Remedy] The hard disk may be defective. To replace the hard disk, contact your local Fuji
Problem Solving
016-786 [Cause] When using the scan feature, available hard disk space is insufficient for writing to
a file.
[Remedy] Either remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to increase free disk space, or
initialize the hard disk.
016-791 [Cause] The forwarding destination or job template save location could not be accessed.
[Remedy] Check whether you can access the specified forwarding destination.
7 016-792 [Cause] Specific job history could not be acquired when printing [Job Report].
[Remedy] The specified job history does not exist.
018-571 [Cause] An internal error occurred.
[Remedy] Perform the same operation again. If the problem persists, contact your local Fuji
021-210 [Cause] An error occurred with the USB IC card reader.
021-211 [Remedy] Check the USB IC card reader connection. Then, switch off the machine power,
make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch on the machine power.
021-213
If the error is not resolved, the USB IC card reader may be broken. Connect a
USB IC card reader that is not broken, and switch on the machine power again.
021-750 [Cause] An error occurred during maintenance or repair request and your local Fuji Xerox
021-751 representative failed.
[Remedy] Confirm that the telephone line is connected and retry after waiting for a while.
021-770
If the error code is displayed again, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative by
021-771 telephone.
021-772
202
Error Code

024-342
024-343
024-345
024-346
024-347
024-348
024-349
024-350
024-351
024-352
024-353
024-354
024-355
024-356
024-357
024-358
Problem Solving
024-359
024-360
024-361
024-362
024-363
024-364
024-365
024-366
7
024-367
024-368
024-370
024-371
024-372
024-373
024-375
024-700 [Cause] The memory capacity or hard disk required to use the optional feature is not
installed.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, and then switch it on again after the touch screen
goes out. If the error still is not resolved, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
040-210 [Cause] An error occurred with the interface module.
[Remedy] Turn the power off and on, and then try the same operation again.
203
7 Problem Solving

041-337
041-338
041-344
041-346
041-347
041-350
041-354
041-355
041-356
041-370
041-372
Problem Solving
042-320
042-321
042-322
042-323
042-324
7 042-325
042-326
042-327
042-328
042-330
042-331
042-338
042-343
204
Error Code

045-312
045-314
045-315
045-316
045-317
045-318
045-360
045-361
045-362
045-363
045-364
045-365
045-366
045-367
Problem Solving
7
205
7 Problem Solving

061-311
061-313
061-315
061-317
061-319
061-320
061-321
061-323
061-325
061-326
061-327
061-328
061-329
061-334
061-335
061-336
Problem Solving
061-337
061-338
061-339
061-340
061-341
061-342
7 061-343
061-348
061-349
061-380
061-381
061-382
061-383
062-277 [Cause] A communication error occurred between the document scanning unit and the
document feeder.
[Remedy] Contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
062-300 [Cause] The top cover and left cover of the document feeder is not completely closed.
[Remedy] Close the top cover and left cover of the document feeder. A staple, metal clip or
other foreign object may be stuck to the magnetic area of the top cover. Open the
top cover of the document feeder and check whether there are any foreign
objects. Remove any foreign objects and then close the top over and left cover.
206
Error Code

062-345
062-357
062-360
062-362
062-371
062-380
062-386
062-393
062-395
062-396
062-397
062-398
switch on the machine power. If the error is not resolved, contact your local Fuji
Problem Solving
Xerox representative. 7
062-790 [Cause] Copying of the scanned document is prohibited.
[Remedy] Refer to "1 Before Using the Machine" > "Legal Notice" in the User Guide.
065-223
065-224
065-225
071-210 [Cause] Tray 1 malfunction
[Remedy] Confirm the paper loading condition for the Tray, and then switch off the machine
power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch on the machine
power. If the error still is not resolved, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative. You can use a tray other than Tray 1.
207
7 Problem Solving

071-211 [Cause] Tray 1 malfunctioned
Problem Solving
7 representative. You can use a tray other than Tray 4.
077-312 [Cause] An error occurred
077-909 [Cause] Jammed paper remains.
[Remedy] Follow the instructions on the touch screen and remove the remaining jammed
paper.
078-250 [Cause] An error occurred in Tray 6 (HCF).
208
Error Code

078-260 [Cause] Tray 6 (HCF) malfunction
078-261 [Remedy] Confirm the paper loading condition for Tray 6 (HCF), and then turn the machine
off and then on. If the error still is not resolved, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
078-260 [Cause] Tray 6 (HCF) or Tray 7 (HCF) malfunction
078-261 [Remedy] Confirm the paper loading condition for Tray 6 (HCF) or Tray 7 (HCF), and then
turn the machine off and then on. If the error still is not resolved, contact your local Fuji
078-263 [Remedy] Confirm the paper loading condition for Tray 6 (HCF), and then turn the machine
off and then on. If the error still is not resolved, contact your local Fuji Xerox
078-264
representative.
078-265
078-266
078-267
078-268
078-269
078-270
078-271
Problem Solving
078-273 [Remedy] Contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
078-274
078-275
078-276
078-277
078-278
078-279 7
078-280
078-281
078-283 [Remedy] Confirm the paper loading condition for Tray 5, and then turn the machine off and
then on. If the error still is not resolved, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
078-285 [Cause] An error has occurred at Tray 6 or 7 (High Capacity Feeder).
078-286 [Remedy] Contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
078-287
078-288
078-289
078-290
078-291
078-298
209
7 Problem Solving

091-407 [Cause] An error occurred in the drum cartridge [R1].
[Remedy] Pull out the drum cartridge [R1], and then insert the cartridge again.
Problem Solving
093-316
093-317
7 093-320 [Cause] An error occurred.
093-329 [Cause] There was an abnormality with the toner cartridge.
[Remedy] Replace with a new toner cartridge. Then switch off the machine power, make
sure that the touch screen is blank, and switch on the machine power again.
093-401 [Cause] Toner cartridge [Y] (yellow) is not installed.
[Remedy] Insert toner cartridge [Y] (yellow).
093-403 [Cause] Toner cartridge [M] (magenta) is not installed.
[Remedy] Insert toner cartridge [M] (magenta).
093-404 [Cause] Toner cartridge [C] (cyan) is not installed.
[Remedy] Insert toner cartridge [C] (cyan).
093-410 [Cause] Toner cartridge [K] (black) is not installed.
[Remedy] Insert toner cartridge [K] (black).
093-426 [Cause] An error occurred in the toner cartridge [K] (black).
[Remedy] Pull out the toner cartridge [K] (black), and then insert the cartridge again.
093-427 [Cause] An error occurred in the toner cartridge [Y] (yellow).
[Remedy] Pull out the toner cartridge [Y] (yellow), and then insert the cartridge again.
093-428 [Cause] An error occurred in the toner cartridge [M] (magenta).
[Remedy] Pull out the toner cartridge [M] (magenta), and then insert the cartridge again.
210
Error Code

093-429 [Cause] An error occurred in the toner cartridge [C] (cyan).
[Remedy] Pull out the toner cartridge [C] (cyan), and then insert the cartridge again.
093-430 [Cause] Toner cartridge [K] (black) is not installed.
093-431 [Remedy] Insert toner cartridge [K] (black).

094-322
094-323
103-312
103-313
112-700 [Cause] The finisher's punch waste container is full.
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Empty the punch waste container.
For more information on how to empty the punch waste container, refer to "Emptying the Punch
Waste Container (For Finisher C2 or Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker)" (P.72) or "Emptying the
Punch Waste Container (For Finisher D4 or Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker)" (P.73).
116-220 [Cause] Failed to enter the Download mode.
* If you cannot resolve an error despite following the instructions described in the table, contact your local Fuji Xerox 7
211
7 Problem Solving

116-312
116-313
116-314
116-315
116-316
116-317
116-318
116-319
116-321
116-322
116-323
116-324
116-325
116-328
116-329
116-330
Problem Solving
116-331
116-332
116-333
116-334
116-336
116-337
7 116-338
116-340
116-341
212
Error Code

116-348
116-349
116-350
116-351
116-352
116-353
116-354
116-355
116-356
116-357
116-358
116-359
116-360
116-361
116-362
116-363
Problem Solving
116-364
116-365
116-366
116-367
116-368
116-370
116-371
116-372
7
116-373
116-374
116-375
116-376
116-377
116-378
116-379
116-380
116-381
116-382
116-383
116-384
116-385
[Remedy] Follow the instructions on the touch screen, and initialize the machine memory.
213
7 Problem Solving

116-393
116-394
116-395
116-397
116-399
117-312 [Cause] A abnormality occurred in the machine.
Problem Solving
121-314 [Cause] An error occurred between the machine and the connected device.
121-318
7 121-319
121-320
121-321
121-322
121-323
121-324
[Remedy] Check that the connected device is turned on. Then, switch off the machine
power. If the error is not resolved, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
121-336
121-337
121-338
121-370
214
Error Code

123-312
123-325
123-326
123-333
123-343
123-344
123-350
123-352
123-353
123-354
123-355
123-356
123-357
123-358
123-362
123-368
Problem Solving
123-369
123-371
123-374
123-377
123-379
123-380
123-381
123-382
7
123-383
123-384
123-389
123-390
123-392
123-393
123-395
123-396
123-397
123-398
123-399
215
7 Problem Solving

124-312
124-313
124-314
124-315
124-316
124-317
124-318
124-319
124-320
124-321
124-322
124-323
124-324
124-325
124-326
124-327
Problem Solving
124-328
124-333
124-334
124-335
124-337
124-338
7 124-339
124-340
124-341
124-342
124-343
124-344
124-345
124-346
124-347
124-348
124-349
124-350
124-351
124-352
124-353
124-360
124-361
124-362
124-363
124-372
124-373
124-374
216
Error Code

124-382
124-383
124-390
124-391
124-392
124-393
124-701 [Cause] The output destination was changed because of the malfunction of the specified
output tray (Side Tray).
[Remedy] Contact your local Fuji Xerox representative. You can use any output trays other
than the defective output tray.
124-702 [Cause] The output destination was changed because of the malfunction of the specified
output tray (Finisher Tray).
[Remedy] Contact your local Fuji Xerox representative. You can use any output trays other
than the defective output tray.
124-705 [Cause] The punch setting was canceled.
[Remedy] Confirm the punch position, and then execute the operation again.
Problem Solving
124-706 [Cause] The folding setting was canceled.
[Remedy] Confirm the folding setting, and then execute the operation again.
124-709 [Cause] The document exceeded the maximum number of pages that can be stapled.
[Remedy] Reduce the number of pages, or cancel the stapling setting, and then try printing
again.
124-710 [Cause] The machine cannot output to the output destination specified. A paper size or a
paper type that cannot be output is specified or the output destination fails.
[Remedy] No measure is required. The machine automatically selects the available output
7
destination. If the paper is not still output from the specified output destination
even after the correct paper size and type is selected, contact your local Fuji
127-210 [Cause] An error occurred in the communication between the machine and Printer Server.
127-211 [Remedy] Unplug the connector cable of the Printer Server, and plug it in again. Switch off
the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch on
the machine power.
[Remedy] Update the software versions for the machine and the Printer Server.
127-221 [Remedy] Unplug the connector cable of the Printer Server, and plug it in again. Switch off
the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch on
the machine power.
217
7 Problem Solving

127-312
127-313
127-314
127-315
127-320
127-342
127-353
127-354
127-396
127-398
127-399
Problem Solving
218
Error Code
Other Errors
This section describes the remedies when the following messages are displayed.
Error
Cause and Remedy
Message
A fault has [Cause] An error occurred.
occurred. [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then
Switch off the switch the machine power on again.
machine. If the message persists, record the content displayed for [(xxx-yyy)]. Then
(xxx-yyy)
immediately switch the main power and power off, make sure that the touch
screen is blank, and then contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
Completed with [Cause] An error occurred, and the operation terminated abnormally.
an error. [Remedy] Execute the operation again.
(xxx-yyy)
A fault has [Cause] An auto-recoverable internal error occurred, and the machine restarted
occurred. The automatically.
machine has [Remedy] Select [Close]. to use the machine normally. If the error still is not resolved,
rebooted. contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
Select [Close].
If the problem
persists, call for
Problem Solving
service.
(xxx-yyy)
219
7 Problem Solving
Paper Jams
When a paper jam occurred, the machine stops and an alarm beeps. A message is also
displayed on the touch screen. Follow the instructions displayed to remove the jammed
paper.
Gently remove the paper to avoid it to be torn. If the paper is torn, remove all the torn
pieces, making sure that none remain inside the machine.
If a paper jam message appears again after you have cleared the paper jam, another
paper jam may be occurred in some other parts of the machine. Clear this by following
the message.
When the paper jam is cleared, printing is automatically resumed from the point when
the paper jam occurred.
If you were during copying, press the <Start> button to resume the copying from the
point when the paper jam occurred.
WARNING
If you need to pull out a tray to remove paper jam, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative. Do not pull out a tray, otherwise it may cause injuries.
Problem Solving
CAUTION
Do not attempt to remove a paper jammed deeply inside the product, particularly a
paper wrapped around a fusing or a heat roller. Otherwise, it may cause injuries or
burns. Switch off the power and then the main power inside the body front cover
promptly and contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
This section describes how to clear a paper jam occurring in the following locations.
7 The following shows the reference section for the procedures to clear a paper jam in
each location.
Paper Jams in Trays 1 and 2......................................................................................................221
Paper Jams in Tray 3.................................................................................................................221
Paper Jams in Tray 4.................................................................................................................222
Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass)..................................................................................................222
Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass) with High Capacity Feeder C1-DS .........................................223
Paper Jams in Tray 6 (A4 High Capacity Feeder) ....................................................................224
Paper Jams in Trays 6 and 7 (High Capacity Feeder C1-DS)...................................................226
Paper Jams in Tray 8 (Interposer on Finisher D4 and Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker) ........229
Paper Jams in the Transfer Module...........................................................................................229
Paper Jams in the Bottom Left Cover .......................................................................................231
Paper Jams in the Bottom Right Cover.....................................................................................232
Paper Jams in the Output Tray..................................................................................................233
Paper Jams in the Finisher C2 and the Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker .................................234
Paper Jams Inside the Finisher Left Cover (For Finisher D4 or Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker)....243
Paper Jams Inside the Finisher Right Cover (For Finisher D4 or Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker)... 246
Paper Jams Inside the Z-Folder (For Finisher D4 or Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker)..........249
Paper Jams at the Output Area of the Finisher..........................................................................252
Paper Jams in the Interface Module..........................................................................................254
Important When a paper jam occurred, if you pull out a paper tray without checking the paper jam
location, the jammed paper may be torn and the pieces may remain inside the machine. This
may cause machine malfunctions; therefore, always check where the paper jam occurred
first.
220
Paper Jams
If any piece of jammed paper remains inside the machine, the paper jam message will not
disappear from the touch screen.
Clear the paper jams while the machine is on. If you turn off the machine, all data stored on
the memory of the machine will be erased.
Do not touch components inside the machine. This may cause print defects.
Paper Jams in Trays 1 and 2

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in Trays 1 and 2.
1 Pull out the tray until it stops where the

paper jam occurred.
Important If you pull out a paper tray without
checking the paper jam location, the
jammed paper may be torn and the
pieces may remain inside the machine.
This may cause machine malfunctions;
therefore, always check where the paper
jam occurred first.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
Problem Solving
Note If the paper is torn, make sure no piece of
paper remains inside the machine.

7
Paper Jams in Tray 3

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in Tray 3.
1 Pull out the tray until it stops where the

paper jam occurred.
jam occurred first.

221
7 Problem Solving
Paper Jams in Tray 4

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in Tray 4.
1 Pull out Tray 4 until it stops where the paper

jam occurred.
jam occurred first.

Problem Solving
3 If paper is jammed in the paper feed section,

open the inner cover and remove the
jammed paper.
Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass)

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in Tray 5 (bypass).
1 Open the top cover of Tray 5 (bypass) and

remove the jammed paper.
222
Paper Jams
2 Remove all paper loaded in Tray 5 (bypass).

Important When two or more sheets of paper are
loaded, remove all of the sheets from the
tray.
3 Close the top cover.

4 Fan the paper you removed and make sure that all four corners are neatly aligned.
5 Insert the paper into the tray with the printing
side facing up until its edge lightly touches
against the paper feed entrance.
maximum fill line ("MAX" in the figure to
the right). It may cause paper jams or
machine malfunctions.
Problem Solving
Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass) with High Capacity Feeder C1-DS
The following describes clearing paper jams occurring in Tray 5 (bypass) when the
High Capacity Feeder C1-DS is installed.
1 Remove any paper jammed in Tray 5

(bypass). 7
tray.
2 If the paper cannot be removed in Step 1,

clear the paper jam by opening the front
cover of the transport unit.
For information about clearing paper jams from the
transport unit, refer to "Paper Jams in Trays 6 and 7
(High Capacity Feeder C1-DS)" (P.226).
223
7 Problem Solving
3 If the paper cannot be removed in Steps 1

and 2, open the top cover of Tray 5 (bypass)
and remove the jammed paper.
4 Close the top cover of Tray 5 (bypass).

5 Fan the paper you removed and make sure that all four corners are neatly aligned.
6 Insert the paper into the tray with the printing
side facing up until its edge lightly touches
against the paper feed entrance.
maximum fill line ("MAX" in the figure to
the right). It may cause paper jams or
machine malfunctions.
Problem Solving
Paper Jams in Tray 6 (A4 High Capacity Feeder)

This section describes how to clear paper jams occurring in the A4 High Capacity
Feeder.
The following shows the reference section for the procedures to clear a paper jam in
7 each location.
Paper Jams in Tray 6 (A4 High Capacity Feeder) Exit.............................................................224
Paper Jams in Tray 6 Top Cover...............................................................................................225
Paper Jams in Tray 6 (A4 High Capacity Feeder) ....................................................................225
Note Remedies will differ depending on where the paper jam occurs. Therefore, be sure to follow
the instructions displayed to remove the jammed paper.
Paper Jams in Tray 6 (A4 High Capacity Feeder) Exit
1 Grasp the handle on the top left side of Tray

6 and slowly pull out the tray to the left until it
stops.
224
Paper Jams

3 Gently push Tray 6 to its original position.
Paper Jams in Tray 6 Top Cover
1 Grasp the handle on the top left side of Tray

6 and slowly pull out the tray to the left until it
stops.
Problem Solving
2 Open the top cover of Tray 6.
1
2

4 Close the top cover of Tray 6.

5 Gently push Tray 6 to its original position.
Paper Jams in Tray 6 (A4 High Capacity Feeder)
1 Pull out Tray 6 towards you until it stops.
CAUTION
Be sure to pull out the paper try slowly. If
parts of your body.
225
7 Problem Solving

Paper Jams in Trays 6 and 7 (High Capacity Feeder C1-DS)

This section describes how to clear paper jams occurring in Trays 6 and 7 (High
Capacity Feeder C1-DS).
each location.
Paper Jams in Trays 6 and 7 (High Capacity Feeder C1-DS)...................................................226
Problem Solving
Paper Jams at Lever 1a and Knob 1c ........................................................................................227

Paper Jams at Lever 1b and Knob 1c........................................................................................227
Paper Jams at Lever 1d and Knob 1c........................................................................................228
Paper Jams in Trays 6 and 7 (High Capacity Feeder C1-DS)

7
1 Pull out the tray where the paper jam
occurred.
CAUTION
Be sure to pull out the paper try slowly. If
parts of your body.

226
Paper Jams
Paper Jams at Lever 1a and Knob 1c
1 Open the front cover of the transport unit.
2 Move lever 1a to the right (1) and turn knob

1c to the right (2). Remove the jammed
paper.
Problem Solving
3 Return lever 1a to its original position.
7
4 Close the front cover of the transport unit.
Note If the front cover of the transport unit is not completely closed, a message will appear and
the machine will not operate.
Paper Jams at Lever 1b and Knob 1c
2 Move lever 1b to the right (1) and turn knob

1c to the right (2). Remove the jammed
paper.
227
7 Problem Solving
3 Return lever 1b to its original position.

Paper Jams at Lever 1d and Knob 1c

Problem Solving
2 Move lever 1d upward (1) and remove the

jammed paper (2).
7 Note If the paper is torn, make sure no piece of

3 If the paper cannot be removed in Step 2,

turn knob 1c to the right (1) and remove the
jammed paper (2).
4 Return lever 1d to its original position.
228
Paper Jams

Paper Jams in Tray 8 (Interposer on Finisher D4 and Finisher D4 with

Booklet Maker)
The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in Tray 8 (Interposer)
(optional).
1 Press the <Cover> button.
Problem Solving
2 Open cover 1e, and remove the jammed
paper and all of the paper loaded in the
Interposer.
tray.
7
3 Fan the paper you removed and make sure that all four corners are aligned correctly.
Then reload the paper.
4 Push cover 1e until it clicks into place and
close it.
Note A message will be displayed and the
machine will not operate if the cover is
even slightly open.
Paper Jams in the Transfer Module

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in the Transfer Module.
Important Before pulling out the transfer module, be sure to check the screen display to confirm
whether there is any paper left in the left or right covers of the machine, the bypass trays,
output tray exits, A4 High Capacity Feeder, High Capacity Feeder C1-DS, or the finishers
(optional). If the transfer module is pulled out when there is paper remaining in any of these
sections, the paper may be torn.
229
7 Problem Solving

2 Turn green lever 2 at the center of the

transfer module to the right until it is in the
horizontal position (1), and then pull the
transfer module towards you until it stops (2).
3 Remove any jammed paper that is visible.

Problem Solving

7
4 Remove the jammed paper while pulling
lever 2a to the right.
5 Pull down lever 2b (1), and remove the

jammed paper (2).
6 Return levers 2a and 2b to their original positions.
230
Paper Jams
7 Push the transfer module in completely (1)

and turn green lever 2 to the left (2).
Note If you cannot turn the lever, pull out the
transfer module halfway and insert it into
the machine again.

machine will not operate if the front cover
Paper Jams in the Bottom Left Cover

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in the bottom left cover.
1 If Tray 6 (A4 High Capacity Feeder) is

attached, grasp the handle on the top left
side of the tray and slowly pull out the tray
until it stops.
Problem Solving
2 Grasp the release handle and open the
bottom left cover of the main unit. 7
3 If paper is jammed at the top, remove the

jammed paper.
231
7 Problem Solving
4 If paper is jammed at the bottom, remove the

jammed paper.
5 Close the bottom left cover.

Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the bottom left cover is even
slightly open.
Paper Jams in the Bottom Right Cover

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in the bottom right cover.
1 If a finisher is installed, follow the steps below.

If no finisher is installed, go to Step 2.
Problem Solving
1) Make sure that the machine is not

operating, and open the front cover of the
finisher.
7
2) Pull lever 1a to the right.
2 Open the bottom right cover while pressing

down the arrow button.
232
Paper Jams
3 Remove the jammed paper at the top.

4 Remove the jammed paper at the bottom.

5 Close the bottom right cover.
Problem Solving
Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the bottom right cover is
even slightly open.
6 If a finisher is installed, return lever 1a to its original position and close the front cover
of the finisher.
7
Paper Jams in the Output Tray
This section describes how to clear paper jams occurring in the output tray.
1 Remove jammed paper from the output tray.

233
7 Problem Solving
Paper Jams in the Finisher C2 and the Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker
This section describes how to clear paper jams occurring in the Finisher C2 (optional)
and the Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker (optional).
The following example shows how to clear paper jams occurring in the Finisher C2 with
Booklet Maker. The procedure for the Finisher C2 is the same.
each location.
Paper Jams at Lever 1a..............................................................................................................234
Paper Jams at Lever 1d and Knob 1c........................................................................................235
Paper Jams at Levers 1a and 1b ................................................................................................235
Paper Jams at Lever 2a (Using Knob 2c)..................................................................................237
Paper Jams at Lever 2b .............................................................................................................238
Paper Jams at Lever 2b (Using Knob 2c) .................................................................................239
Paper Jams at Lever 3 ...............................................................................................................240
Paper Jams at Exit Cover H ......................................................................................................240
Paper Jams at Knob 4a (For Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker)................................................241
Paper Jams at Lever 4b (For Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker) ...............................................242
Problem Solving
Paper Jams in the Booklet Tray (For Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker) ..................................243
Paper Jams at Lever 1a

2 Pull lever 1a to the right.

4 Return lever 1a back to its original position.
234
Paper Jams

Paper Jams at Lever 1d and Knob 1c

2 Push lever 1d to the left (1) and move lever 6

upward (2).
Problem Solving
3 Turn knob 1c in the direction indicated by the
arrow (1) and remove the jammed paper (2).
Note If the paper is torn, make sure no piece of 7
4 Return levers 1d and 6 to their original positions.

Paper Jams at Levers 1a and 1b

235
7 Problem Solving

4 If the jammed paper cannot be removed in

Problem Solving
Step 3, return lever 1a to its original position

(1), and pull lever 1b to the right (2).
7
5 Gently pull out the jammed paper.

1 If you can see the edge of the jammed paper

on the output tray, gently pull out the paper
from the exit area.
236
Paper Jams
2 Open the front cover of the finisher.
Problem Solving
5 Return lever 2a to its original position. 7

Paper Jams at Lever 2a (Using Knob 2c)
1 If you can see the edge of the jammed paper

on the output tray, gently pull out the paper
from the exit area.
237
7 Problem Solving
4 Turn knob 2c in the direction indicated by the

arrow to move the jammed paper.
Jammed paper

Problem Solving

7 6 Return lever 2a to its original position.

Paper Jams at Lever 2b
2 Pull lever 2b to the right and remove the

Jammed paper
jammed paper.
paper remains inside the machine. 2b
238
Paper Jams

Paper Jams at Lever 2b (Using Knob 2c)

Jammed paper
jammed paper.
paper remains inside the machine. 2b
Problem Solving
3 Turn knob 2c in the direction indicated by the Jammed paper
arrow to move the jammed paper.
7


239
7 Problem Solving
Paper Jams at Lever 3
2 Pull lever 3 downward.

Jammed paper
Problem Solving

7
4 Return lever 3 to its original position.
Paper Jams at Exit Cover H
1 Open exit cover H of the finisher upward.
240
Paper Jams
2 Gently pull out the jammed paper to the

right.
Jammed paper
3 Return exit cover H to its original position.
Paper Jams at Knob 4a (For Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker)
Problem Solving
2 Pull out unit 4.
3 Turn knob 4a counterclockwise (to the left)

and remove all of the loaded paper.
4 Return unit 4 to its original position.

241
7 Problem Solving
Paper Jams at Lever 4b (For Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker)
2 Pull lever 4b to the left.

Problem Solving
3 Remove any jammed paper.
7
4 Pull out unit 4.
5 Remove all jammed paper protruding from

the top left of the unit and all the paper inside
the unit.

7 Close lever 4b.
242
Paper Jams
Paper Jams in the Booklet Tray (For Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker)
2 Turn knob 4a to the right to move the

jammed paper onto the Booklet Tray.
Problem Solving
7
Paper Jams Inside the Finisher Left Cover (For Finisher D4 or Finisher D4
with Booklet Maker)
This section describes how to clear paper jams occurring inside the Finisher Left Cover
of Finisher D4 (optional) or the Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker (optional).
each location.
Paper Jams at Lever 1a and Knob 1c ....................................................................................... 244
Paper Jams at Lever 1d............................................................................................................. 244
Paper Jams at Lever 1b............................................................................................................. 245
243
7 Problem Solving
Paper Jams at Lever 1a and Knob 1c

and open the left cover of the finisher.
2 Pull lever 1a downward (1) and turn knob 1c

counterclockwise (2). Remove the jammed
paper.
Problem Solving
7
4 Close the finisher left cover.
Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the left cover of the finisher
Paper Jams at Lever 1d

2 Pull lever 1d upward and remove the

jammed paper.
244
Paper Jams
3 Return lever 1d to its original position.


Problem Solving
jammed paper.
paper remains inside the machine. 7

245
7 Problem Solving
Paper Jams Inside the Finisher Right Cover (For Finisher D4 or Finisher
D4 with Booklet Maker)
This section describes how to clear paper jams occurring inside the Finisher Right
Cover of Finisher D4 (optional) or the Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker (optional).
each location.
Paper Jams at Levers 3b and 3d ................................................................................................246
Paper Jams at Lever 3e and Knob 3c ........................................................................................247
Paper Jams at Lever 3g and Knob 3f ........................................................................................247
Paper Jams at Lever 4b and Knob 3a........................................................................................248
Paper Jams at Levers 3b and 3d

Problem Solving
2 Move levers 3b and 3d, and remove the

7 jammed paper.
3 Return levers 3b and 3d to their original

positions.
4 Close the finisher right cover.

246
Paper Jams
Paper Jams at Lever 3e and Knob 3c

2 Move lever 3e (1), and turn knob 3c

clockwise (2). Remove the jammed paper.
Problem Solving
3 Return lever 3e to its original position.
7
Paper Jams at Lever 3g and Knob 3f

2 Move lever 3g (1), and turn knob 3f

paper.
247
7 Problem Solving
3 Return lever 3g to its original position.

Paper Jams at Lever 4b and Knob 3a

Problem Solving
2 Move lever 4b (1), and turn knob 3a

clockwise (2). Remove the jammed paper.
7 Note If the paper is torn, make sure no piece of


248
Paper Jams
Paper Jams Inside the Z-Folder (For Finisher D4 or Finisher D4 with

Booklet Maker)
This section describes how to clear paper jams occurring inside the optional Folder for
Finisher D4 (optional) or the Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker (optional).
each location.
Paper Jams at Lever 2a and Knob 3a ....................................................................................... 249
Paper Jams at Lever 2b and Knob 2c ....................................................................................... 250
Paper Jams at Knob 2c, Levers 2e and 2f, and Tri-fold Output Tray 2d ................................. 250
Paper Jams at Tri-fold Output Tray 2d and Lever 2g .............................................................. 251
Paper Jams at Unit 4 and Knob 4a ........................................................................................... 252
Paper Jams at Lever 2a and Knob 3a

Problem Solving
2 Move lever 2a (1), and turn knob 3a
7
paper.
3 Return levers 2a to its original position.

249
7 Problem Solving
Paper Jams at Lever 2b and Knob 2c

2 Move lever 2b (1), and turn knob 2c

paper.
Problem Solving
3 Return levers 2b to its original position.
7
Paper Jams at Knob 2c, Levers 2e and 2f, and Tri-fold Output Tray 2d

2 Pull out tri-fold output tray 2d, open lever 2e,

and remove the jammed paper.
250
Paper Jams
3 If the jammed paper cannot be removed in

Step 2, return lever 2e to its original position
(1). Open lever 2e, turn knob 2c
counterclockwise (2), and then remove the
jammed paper.
4 Close lever 2f or 2e (1), and push in tri-fold

output tray 2d (2).

Problem Solving
Paper Jams at Tri-fold Output Tray 2d and Lever 2g

2 Pull out tri-fold output tray 2d (1), open lever

2g (2), and remove the jammed paper.
3 Return lever 2g to its original position (1),

and push in tri-fold output tray 2d (2).

251
7 Problem Solving
Paper Jams at Unit 4 and Knob 4a

2 Pull out unit 4.

Problem Solving
3 Turn knob 4a counterclockwise to remove

the jammed paper from the left side of unit 4.
7
Paper Jams at the Output Area of the Finisher

This section describes how to clear paper jams occurring at the output area of the
finisher.
each location.
Paper Jams at the Output Tray ..................................................................................................253
Paper Jams at the Finisher Tray ................................................................................................253
Paper Jams at the Booklet Output Tray ....................................................................................253
252
Paper Jams
Paper Jams at the Output Tray
1 Remove the jammed paper from the output

tray.
2 Open and close the right cover of the finisher.

Paper Jams at the Finisher Tray
1 Remove the jammed paper from the finisher

tray.
Problem Solving
7
2 Open and close the right cover of the finisher.
Paper Jams at the Booklet Output Tray

2 Turn knob 4a clockwise to remove the

jammed paper at the booklet output tray.

machine will not operate if the right cover
of the finisher is even slightly open.
253
7 Problem Solving
Paper Jams in the Interface Module

This section describes how to clear paper jams occurring in the Interface Module.
each location.
Paper Jams at Lever 2b .............................................................................................................255
1 Open the front cover of the Interface Module.

Problem Solving
2 Pull lever 1a downward and remove the

jammed paper.
4 Close the front cover of the Interface Module.

Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover of the
Interface Module is even slightly open.
254
Paper Jams
1 Pull lever 2b downward, turn knob 2c

counterclockwise, and remove the jammed
paper.
Problem Solving

255
7 Problem Solving
1 Pull lever 2a upward, turn knob 2c

counterclockwise, and remove the jammed
paper.

Problem Solving

256
Document Jams
Document Jams
When a document jam occurred in the document feeder, the machine stops and a
message is displayed on the touch screen. Follow the instructions displayed to clear
the document jam and then load the document in the document feeder again.
each location.
Document Jams at the Covers .................................................................................................. 257
Document Jams Under the Document Feeder Belt .................................................................. 259
Document Jams at the Covers
1 Pull up the handle of the top cover of the

document feeder, and then open the top
cover until it comes to a stop.
Note When you fully open the cover, it enters a
fixed position. Open the cover gently.
Problem Solving
2 Open the left cover until it comes to a stop.
3 If the document is not caught in the entry of

the document feeder, pull out the document.
4 If the message on the screen tells you to

open the inner cover, lift up the lever with the
green seal, and open the inner cover (1).
Remove the jammed document (2).
Important If the document is caught, do not pull it
out forcibly. The document could be
damaged.
257
7 Problem Solving
5 If the message on the screen indicates that

the jam occurred inside the left cover,
remove the jammed document.
6 Close the inner cover of the document feeder, and then close the top cover until it
clicks into place.
7 Close the left cover of the document feeder until it clicks into place.
8 If you cannot find the document, lift the document feeder gently, and remove the
document if it is there, and then close the document feeder.
9 If you still cannot find the document in step
8, lift the document feeder tray and remove
the document.
Problem Solving
7 10 Return the document feeder tray gently to its original position.

11 Make sure that the document is not torn, wrinkled or folded, and then load the
document again following the instructions displayed on the touch screen.
Note Torn, wrinkled or folded documents may cause document jams and damage. To scan such
documents, directly place the document on the document glass to make copies.
258
Document Jams
Document Jams Under the Document Feeder Belt
1 Open the document cover.
2 Open the belt of the document cover while

gripping the lever, and remove the jammed
document.
Problem Solving
3 Gently return the belt to its original position.
7
4 Put the document cover back in place.
5 Make sure that the document is not torn, wrinkled or folded, and then load the
document again following the instructions displayed on the touch screen.
Note Torn, wrinkled or folded documents may cause document jams and damage. To scan such
documents, directly place the document on the document glass to make copies.
259
7 Problem Solving
Stapler Faults
This section describes how to clear stapler troubles when the optional finisher is
installed.
Perform the procedures on the following pages when copies are not stapled or staples
are bent. Contact your local Fuji Xerox representative if the problem persists after you
have tried the following solutions.
Unstapled Bent staple
If copies are stapled as shown in the figures below, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
Problem Solving
One side of staple rising up Staple bent in reverse direction
Flattened staple Entire staple rising up
Staple rising up with

center pressed in
Important Depending on the type of paper that is being stapled, the stapled nails may be bent. If the
bent nails are stuck inside the machine, they may eventually cause paper jams.
Remove bent staples when opening the staple cartridge cover. If you do not remove bent
staples, a staple jam may occur as a result. Use the staple cartridge cover only when
removing bent staples.
260
Stapler Faults
Staple Jams in Staple Cartridge (For Finisher C2 or Finisher C2 with

Booklet Maker)
The following describes how to clear staple jams occurring in the staple cartridge of the
Finisher C2 (optional) or the Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker (optional).
The following example shows how to clear a staple jam that occurred in the Finisher C2
with Booklet Maker. The procedure for the Finisher C2 is the same.
CAUTION
Be careful not to get injured when removing jammed staples.

and open the finisher front cover.
Problem Solving
2 Grip lever R1 of the staple cartridge holder,
and pull out the holder to the right towards
you.
Lever (R1) 7
3 Remove the staple cartridge holder by

gripping the orange lever.
Note The staple cartridge is firmly set in place.
Removing the cartridge may require
pulling on the cartridge with slight force.
Orange lever
4 After you take out the staple cartridge, check

inside of the finisher for any remaining
staples.
261
7 Problem Solving
5 Pull up the metal part of the staple cartridge

as shown in the illustration.
6 Remove the jammed staples (1), and then

return the metal part pulled up in Step 5 to its
original position (2).
2
CAUTION
Be careful not to get injured when
removing jammed staples.
1
7 Insert the staple cartridge while gripping the

Problem Solving
orange lever until you hear it click into place.
Orange lever
7 8 Close the finisher front cover.

If you cannot remove jammed staples even after you perform the above procedure,
contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
Staple Jams in the Booklet Staple Cartridge (For Finisher C2 with Booklet
Maker)
The following describes how to clear a staple jam that occurred in the staple cartridge
of the Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker (optional).

262
Stapler Faults

R3
the machine (2).
R2
3 Hold the booklet staple cartridge by the tabs

on both sides and lift the cartridge out of the
unit.
4 Remove the jammed staples as shown in the
Problem Solving
illustration.
CAUTION
7
5 While holding the tabs of the removed
booklet staple cartridge, push the cartridge
back to its original position. Lightly push the
cartridge down until you hear it click into
place.
6 Push the removed unit back into the

machine until it clicks into place.
7 Close the finisher front cover.

263
7 Problem Solving
Staple Jams in the Staple Cartridge (For Finisher D4 or Finisher D4 with

Booklet Maker)
The following describes how to clear staple jams occurring in the staple cartridge of the
Finisher D4 (optional) or the Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker (optional).
For remedies if the staple cartridge happened to come off the holder during replacement work, refer to
"Re-inserting the Staple Cartridge into the Cartridge Unit" (P.267).
The following example shows how to clear a staple jam that occurred in the Finisher D4
with Booklet Maker. The procedure for the Finisher D4 is the same.
CAUTION

Problem Solving
2 Hold R1 at the position shown in the

illustration.
3 Pull out the unit.

Note After removing the unit, check inside of
the finisher for any remaining staples.
4 Open the unit as shown in the illustration and

remove the jammed staples.
CAUTION
264
Stapler Faults
5 Push the removed unit back to its original

position.

Staple Jams in the Booklet Staple Cartridge (For Finisher D4 with Booklet
Maker)
Problem Solving
The following describes how to clear a staple jam that occurred in the booklet staple
cartridge of the Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker (optional).


the machine (2).
3 Hold the booklet staple cartridge by the tabs

on both sides and lift the cartridge out of the
unit.
265
7 Problem Solving
4 Remove the jammed staples as shown in the

illustration.
CAUTION
5 While holding the tabs of the removed

booklet staple cartridge, push the cartridge
back to its original position. Lightly push the
cartridge down until you hear it click into
place.
6 Return the unit to its original position.

7
Problem Solving
Close the front cover of the finisher.

266
Re-inserting the Staple Cartridge into the Cartridge Unit
Re-inserting the Staple Cartridge into the Cartridge Unit
This section describes how to re-insert the staple cartridge to the cartridge unit when it
has been inserted incorrectly or removed accidentally.
CAUTION
1 Open the staple cartridge cover as shown in

the illustration, and remove the jammed
staple.
CAUTION
2 Look for the lever on the rear side of the unit.
Problem Solving
7
3 Move the lever in the direction indicated by
the arrow in the illustration.
Important Be careful when removing jammed
staples to avoid hurting your fingers and
nails.
4 Turn the unit upright while holding the lever,

and then remove the staple cartridge from
the cartridge unit.
267
7 Problem Solving
5 Tear the outside staples along the line as

shown in the illustration.
Important Be careful when removing jammed
staples to avoid hurting your fingers.
6 Push the staple cartridge into the unit.
7 Return the unit to its original position.

Problem Solving
7 8 Close the right cover of the finisher.

268
Correcting the Curl of Outputs (When Finisher D4 or Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker is Installed)
Correcting the Curl of Outputs (When Finisher D4 or Finisher D4

with Booklet Maker is Installed)
You can correct the curling of the output by pressing the De-curl button.
The De-curl button functions when the machine is in operation or idle as long as its
power is on.
Note To change the curling correction mode while the machine is in operation, press the De-curl
button and then the change will be applied immediately.
Pressing the <Clear All> button on the control panel will not change the curling correction
mode.
1 Check the direction of the curl of the output

copy.
Problem Solving
2 Check that the De-curl button is lit.
Note When the machine is switched on, the
curl correction mode is set to Auto.
When Power Save is canceled, the curl
correction mode is set to Auto.
3 Press the De-curl button.
Downward Curling
Upward Curling
Note Pressing the De-curl button switches between the AUTO, ON, and OFF modes.
For more information, refer to "Modes and Functions of the <De-curl> Button" (P.270).
269
7 Problem Solving
Modes and Functions of the <De-curl> Button

The following describes the modes and functions of the <De-curl> button.
Pressing the up-curl compensation button switches modes as follows.
Pressing the down-curl compensation button switches modes as follows.

Problem Solving
Indicator Mode Functions

<AUTO> Automatically performs appropriate curl correction
depending on the sizes and orientations of
documents.
The button should be set to Auto in most situations.
7
The button automatically switches to the Auto mode
when:
the machine is switched on

the machine exits Power Saver
Upward Performs upward curl correction on all paper.
Curling If your output is curled upward, press this button to
<ON> prevent upward curls.
Downward Performs downward curl correction on all paper.

Curling If your output curled downward, press this button to
<ON> prevent downward curls.
<OFF> When no indicator is lit, the machine does not

perform the curling correction to straighten the
curled output.
270
8 Appendix
This chapter describes the machine specifications, notes and restrictions,

optional components, and printer emulation languages.
z Specifications............................................................................................ 272
z
Optional Components ............................................................................... 281
z
Alignment Adjustment Settings .................................................................282
z Adjust Fold Position .................................................................................. 291
z
Adjust Image Transfer ..............................................................................300
z
Notes and Restrictions..............................................................................304
8 Appendix
Specifications
This section lists the main specifications of the machine. Note that the specifications
and the appearance of the product may change without prior notice.
Copy Function
Type Console
Memory 2.0 GB
HDD 80 GB - 160 GB
Important Not all the HDD space described above can be used.
Color Capability Full color
Scanning Resolution 600 x 600 dpi
Printing Resolution 2,400 x 2,400 dpi (multicolored photo), 600 x 600 dpi (text/
textphoto/photo/maps)
Halftone/Printable Colors 256 color gradation for each color (16,700,000 colors)
Warm-up Time 90 seconds or less*
When the main power is switched on, it takes 90 seconds or less*.
*: The values are based on a room temperature of 20 C and on the
factory default setting.
Original Paper Size The maximum size is 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17") for both sheets
and books.
Appendix
Output Paper Size Maximum: SRA3, 13 x 18" (330.2 x 457.2 mm)

[Maximum for bypass tray: 13 19.2" (330.2 x 488 mm)]
Minimum: A5
[Minimum for bypass tray: Postcard (100 x 148 mm), Envelope
8 (120 x 235 mm)]

Image loss width: Top edge, 4 mm or less; bottom edge, 4 mm or
less; left and right edges, 3.5 mm or less
Output Paper Weight Paper Tray 1 to 4: 64 - 220 gsm
Paper Tray 5: 64 - 300 gsm
Important Use paper recommended by Fuji Xerox. Copying may not
be performed correctly depending on the conditions.
First Copy Output Time Monochrome: 4.1 seconds (for A4 /monochrome priority mode)
Color: 6.5 seconds (for A4 /color priority mode)
Important The values may vary depending on the machine
configuration.
Reduction/Enlargement Size-for-Size 1:10.7%
Preset % 1:0.500, 1:0.707, 1:0.816, 1:0.866, 1:1.154, 1:1.225,
1:1.414
Variable % 1:0.25 - 1:4.00 (1% increments)
272
Specifications
Continuous Copy Speed <Color 550 Printer>

z
Paper Tray 1-4: Continuous 1-sided copy/same magnification
[Monochrome] [Color]
A4 , B5 : 55 sheets/minute 50 sheets/minute
A4, B5: 40 sheets/minute 36 sheets/minute
B4: 33 sheets/minute 30 sheets/minute
A3: 27 sheets/minute 25 sheets/minute
<Color 560 Printer>

z Paper Tray 1-4: Continuous 1-sided copy/same magnification
[Monochrome] [Color]
A4 , B5 : 65 sheets/minute 60 sheets/minute
A4, B5: 47 sheets/minute 44 sheets/minute
B4: 39 sheets/minute 36 sheets/minute
A3: 33 sheets/minute 30 sheets/minute
Important The speed may be reduced due to image quality

adjustment.
The performance may be reduced depending on the paper
type or paper tray.
Paper Tray Capacity Standard:
500 sheets x 2 trays + 870 sheets + 1,140 sheets + 250 sheets
(bypass tray)
Optional:
A4 High Capacity Feeder: 2,000 sheets
High Capacity Feeder C1-DS: 4,000 sheets
Maximum paper capacity:
Appendix
7,260 sheets (standard + High Capacity Feeder C1-DS)
Important When using 80 gsm paper
Continuous Copy 9,999 images
Note The machine may pause temporarily to perform image
adjustment. 8
Output Tray Capacity Output Tray: Approximately 500 sheets (A4)
Note When using 80 gsm paper
Power Supply AC 220 - 240 V 10%, 50/60 Hz 3%
Power Consumption Maximum power consumption: 2.4 kW (AC 240 V10%)
Low Power mode: 104 W or less
Sleep mode: 2.0 W or less (AC 220 - 240 V)
Standby mode: 193 W or less
Dimensions Width 1,427 x Depth 804 x Height 1,392 mm
Machine Weight 247 kg
Important The weight of paper and the toner cartridges is not included.
Space Requirement Width 1,574* x Depth 804 mm
*: When the bypass tray is fully extended.
Scan Function
Type Color scanner

Original Paper Size The maximum size is 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17") for both sheets
and books.
Scanning Resolution 600 x 600 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi
273
8 Appendix
Scanning Speed Monochrome: 80 sheets/minute

Color: 50 sheets/minute
Important The scanning speed varies depending on documents.
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder
Type Duplex automatic document feeder

Original Paper Size Maximum: 279 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17")
Minimum: 139.7 x 210 mm (A5)
38 - 200 gsm
(2 sided: 50 - 128 gsm)
Capacity 250 sheets (A4 1 sided)
Feeding Speed Monochrome: 80 sheets/minute (A4 1 sided)
Color: 50 sheets/minute (A4 1 sided)
A4 High Capacity Feeder (Optional)

Paper Size Maximum: A4 , 8.5 x 11"
Minimum: B5
Paper Capacity / 2,000 sheets x 1 Tray
Number of Trays Important When using 80 gsm paper
Paper Weight 64 - 220 gsm
Note
Appendix
It is recommended to use
papers recommended by
Fuji Xerox.
Dimensions Width 389 x Depth 610 x Height 377 mm
8 Weight 29 kg
Space Requirement Width 1,574 x Depth 804 mm (A4 High Capacity Feeder + main
unit + Offset Catch Tray. When the bypass tray is extended to the
maximum.)
High Capacity Feeder C1-DS (Optional)

Paper Size Maximum: A3
Minimum: B5*
Non-standard Size:182 (Y direction) x 182 (X direction) mm to
330 (Y direction) x 488 (X direction) mm
*: Postcard can be used with Postcard Kit when copying.
Note The printable postcard size is 100 x 148 mm only.
The postcard size (100 x 148 mm) cannot be specified as a
non-standard size.
Paper Capacity / 2,000 sheets x 2 Trays
Number of Trays Important When using 80 gsm paper
Note
It is recommended to use
papers recommended by
Fuji Xerox.
Power Supply 200-240VAC, 5.0/3.0A
274
Specifications
Weight 220 kg*

*: Including the bypass tray and control panel.
Space Requirement Width 2,045 x Depth 804 mm (High Capacity Feeder C1-DS +
main unit + Offset Catch Tray. When the bypass tray is extended
to the maximum.)
Offset Catch Tray (optional)
Paper Size Maximum: 13 x 19", 12.6 x 19.2"

Minimum : Postcards (148 mm x 210mm)
Paper Capacity Approx. 500 Sheets (A4)
Dimensions / Weight Width 460 x Depth 393 x Height 184 mm, 6 kg
Finisher C2 (Optional)
Type Output Tray Collate / Stack (offset stacking available)

Finisher Tray Collate (offset stacking available) / Stack (offset
stacking available)
Paper Size/ Output Tray Maximum: 13 x 19", 12.6 x 19.2"
Paper Weight Minimum: Postcard (100 x 148)
64 - 300 gsm
Finisher Tray Maximum: 13 x 19", 12.6 x 19.2"
Appendix
Minimum: B5
64 - 220 gsm
Stacker Output Tray 500 sheets (A4)
Capacity
Important
Finisher Tray
(not stapled)
A4:
B4 or larger:
3,000 sheets
1,500 sheets 8
When using 80 Mixed stack*: 300 sheets
gsm paper. *: Larger size paper is stacked on top of smaller size
paper.
Finisher Tray A4: 200 sets or 3,000 sheets
(stapled) B4 or larger: 100 sets or 1,500 sheets
Staple Capacity 50 sheets (90 gsm or less, Uncoated)
Important Note Depending on the type of paper that is
When using 80 being stapled, the stapled nails may be
gsm paper. bent.
Paper Size Maximum: A3, 11 x 17"
Minimum: B5
Position 1 place: Front/back, angled stapling
2 places: Parallel stapling
Punch Paper Size Maximum: 11 x 17"
Important Minimum: B5
When using 80 Number of Holes 2 or 4,
gsm paper. 3 (optional)
Dimensions Width 772 x Depth 650 x Height 1,010 mm
Weight 55 kg
275
8 Appendix
Space Requirement Width 2,024 x Depth 804 mm (Main unit +

Finisher C2. When the bypass tray is extended
to the maximum.)
Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker (Optional)
Type Output Tray Collate / Stack

Finisher Tray Collate / Stack (offset stacking available)
Booklet Tray Collate / Stack
Paper Weight Minimum: Postcard (100 x 148)
64 - 300 gsm
Minimum: B5
64 - 220 gsm
Booklet Tray Maximum: A3, 11 x 17"
Minimum: A4, 8.5 x 11"
64 - 220 gsm
Capacity
Finisher Tray A4: 3,000 sheets
Important (not stapled) B4 or larger: 1,500 sheets
When using 80 Mixed stack*: 300 sheets
gsm paper. *: Larger size paper is stacked on top of smaller size
paper.
Appendix

Booklet Tray 20 sets
8
Note Some Papers may not be placed into tray
depending on the Paper type.
Staple Capacity 50 sheets (90 gsm or less, Uncoated)
Important 7 sheets (106 to 176 gsm, Coated)
When using 80 Note Depending on the type of paper that is
gsm paper. being stapled, the stapled nails may be
bent.
Minimum: B5
Position 1 place: Front/back, angled stapling
2 places: Parallel stapling
Punch Paper Size Maximum: 11 x 17"
Minimum: B5
Number of Holes 2 or 4,
3 (optional)
276
Specifications
Booklet Capacity Center binding: 15 sheets*

Finishing Center folding: 5 sheets
Important *: 14 sheets when attaching a cover. The maximum
number of sheets can be changed by the customer
When using 80
engineer.
gsm paper.
Paper Size Maximum: 13 x 18"
Paper Weight Center binding: 64 to 220 gsm*
Center folding: 64 to 220 gsm*
Single folding: 64 to 220 gsm
*: Up to 220 gsm paper can be used for cover sheets.
When 91 to 220 gsm paper is used for a cover,
paper that can be used for body contents becomes
64 to 80 gsm.
Dimensions Width 921 x Depth 650 x Height 1,010 mm
Weight 86 kg
Finisher C2 with Booklet Maker. When the bypass
tray is extend to the maximum.)
Finisher D4 (Optional)
Appendix
Paper Weight Minimum: Postcard (100 x 148 mm)
64 - 300 gsm
Minimum: B5
Stacker Output Tray

64 - 300 gsm
500 sheets
8
Capacity Finisher Tray A4 : 3,000 sheets
When using 80 Mix stack: 350 sheets*
gsm paper. *: When larger size papers are loaded on smaller size
papers.
Finisher Tray A4 : 200 sets or 3,000 sheets
Staple Capacity 100 sheets (64 - 300 gsm)
Note When using paper over A4, or 8.5 x 11",
maximum stapled sheets is 65 sheets.
Depending on the type of paper that is
being stapled, the stapled nails may be
bent.
Minimum: B5
Position <1 place>
Front: Angled stapling
Center: Parallel stapling
Rear: Parallel stapling
<2 places>
Parallel stapling*
*: The supported paper orientation for A4-size paper
is .
277
8 Appendix
Punch Paper Size Maximum: A3, 11 x 17"

Minimum: B5 (2 holes), A4 (4 holes)
Number of Holes 2 or 4,
3 (optional)
Folding Z-Fold Paper Size A3, B4, 11 x 17"
(when D4 Paper Weight 64 - 90 gsm
Folder Unit is
installed) C-Fold Paper Size A4, 8.5 x 11"
Interposer Paper Size Maximum: A3, 11 x 17"
Minimum: B5
Note You cannot print on the paper loaded in
interposer.
Capacity 200 sheets
Important When using 80 gsm paper.
Power Supply 100 - 240VAC, 2.0-1.0A
When D4 Folder Unit is installed:

Width 1,250 x Depth 727 x Height 1,165 mm
Weight 115 kg
Appendix
When D4 Folder Unit is installed: 155 kg

Note This weight includes staple cartridge.
Space Requirement Width 2,560 x Depth 804 mm (main unit +
interface module + Finisher D4. When the bypass
8 tray is extended to the maximum.)
Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker (Optional)

Booklet Tray Collate / Stack
Paper Size/ Output Tray Maximum: 12.6 x 19.2", 13 x 19"
Paper Weight Minimum: Postcard (100 x 148 mm)
64 - 300 gsm
Minimum: B5
64 - 300 gsm
Booklet Tray Maximum: 13 x 18"
64 - 300 gsm
278
Specifications

Capacity
Finisher Tray A4: 2,000 sheets
When using 80 Mix stack: 300 sheets*
gsm paper. *: When larger size papers are loaded on smaller size
papers.
Booklet Tray 20 sets
Note Some papers may not be placed into tray
depending on the Paper Weight.
Staple Capacity 100 sheets (64 - 300 gsm)
Note When using paper over A4, or 8.5 x 11",
maximum stapled sheets is 65 sheets.
Depending on the type of paper that is
being stapled, the stapled nails may be
bent.
Minimum: B5
Position <1 place>
Front: Angled stapling
Center: Parallel stapling
Rear: Parallel stapling*
<2 places>
Appendix
Parallel stapling*
*: The supported paper is A4 and A3.
Punch Paper Size Maximum: A3, 11 x 17"
Minimum: B5 (2 holes), A4 (4 holes)
Number of Holes 2 or 4, 8
3 (optional)
Booklet Capacity Center binding: 20 sheets*
Finishing Center folding: 5 sheets
Important Single folding: 1 sheet
*: 19 sheets when attaching a cover. The maximum
When using 80
number of sheets can be changed by the customer
gsm paper.
engineer (up to 25 sheets).
Paper Weight Center binding: 64 to 220 gsm*
Center folding: 64 to 220 gsm*
Single folding: 64 to 220 gsm
*: Up to 220 gsm paper can be used for cover sheets.
When 91 to 220 gsm paper is used for a cover,
paper that can be used for body contents becomes
64 to 80 gsm.
Folding Z-Fold Paper Size A3, B4, 11 x 17"
(when D4
Folder Unit is
installed) C-Fold Paper Size A4, 8.5 x 11"
279
8 Appendix
Interposer Paper Size Maximum: A3, 11 x 17"

Minimum: B5
Note You cannot print on the paper loaded in
interposer.
Capacity 200 sheets
Important When using 80 gsm paper.
When D4 Folder Unit is installed:

Width 1,255 x Depth 727 x Height 1,165 mm
Weight 150 kg
When D4 Folder Unit is installed: 190 kg

Note This weight includes staple cartridge.
Space Requirement Width 2,575 x Depth 804 mm (main unit +
interface module + Finisher D4 with Booklet
Maker. When the bypass tray is extended to the
maximum.)
Interface Module (Optional)

Appendix

Weight 45 kg
8 interface module. When the bypass tray is
extended to the maximum.)
An Interface Module is required when connecting a Finisher D4 or a Finisher D4 with

Booklet Maker to the main unit.
280
Optional Components
Optional Components
The following table shows the optional components available. To purchase these
options, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
Product Name Description

A4 High Capacity Feeder A tray that can load 2,000 sheets of paper (when using 80 gsm
paper).
High Capacity Feeder Allows you to load 2,000 sheets of paper (when using 80 gsm
C1-DS paper) into Trays 6 and 7.
Postcard Kit A kit to set the Postcard Unit to the machine.
Catch Tray Fan Kit A kit to set the Catch Tray Fan to the machine.
Offset Catch Tray This unit allows to eject paper with an offset.
Finisher C2 Staples or hole-punches output sheets.
Finisher C2 with Booklet Staples or hole-punches output sheets. Also folds output
Maker sheets in half or staples folded output.
3 Hole Punch Unit for The number of punching holes can be changed to 3.
C Finisher Note This is available only when the Finisher C2 or Finisher
C2 with Booklet Maker is installed.
Finisher D4 Staples or hole-punches output sheets.
Interposer is installed for loading paper to be used as
separators and covers.
Appendix
Finisher D4 with Booklet Staples or hole-punches output sheets. Also folds output
Maker sheets in half or staples folded output.
Interposer is installed for loading paper to be used as
separators and covers.
D4 Folder Unit Used to fold sheets in Z-folded or C-folded form.
8
Note This is available only when the Finisher D4 or Finisher
D4 with Booklet Maker is installed.
3 Hole Punch Unit for The number of punching holes can be changed to 3.
Finisher D4 Note Four-hole punching cannot be used when this option is
installed.
This is available only when the Finisher D4 or Finisher
D4 with Booklet Maker is installed.
Interface Module Used when attaching the Finisher D4 or Finisher D4 with
Booklet Maker. The module is installed with a mechanism for
adjusting paper curl.
Note The optional components are subject to change without notice.

For the latest information, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
281
8 Appendix
Alignment Adjustment Settings
This section describes adjusting the position of the printout image. You can adjust the
image to print on the paper (image position, scale, and skew), and set the adjustment
value to any of 20 types. You can assign the set type to a custom paper and a tray.
Make adjustments when the position of the printout image is misaligned as a result of
paper expansion or contraction, cutting accuracy, or paper storage conditions. Adjust
the position of the printout image with the alignment adjustment settings.
Alignment Adjustment
You can make the following adjustments to the position of printout images on the
machine.
Appendix
8 Skew Adjustment
Adjust a skewed image.
Perpendicularity (Rhombic Distortion) Adjustment

Adjust the distortion of an image.
Scale Adjustment
Adjust this when the size (scale) of the printout image is offset.

Adjust the position of the image in the paper feed direction (X direction) and the vertical
direction in relation to the paper feed direction (Y direction). Adjust this when, for
instance, the images on sides 1 and 2 are misaligned.
When adjusting multiple items, adjust them in the following order: Skew Adjustment >
Perpendicularity Adjustment > Scale Adjustment > Print Position Adjustment.
The following is an outline of the procedure for alignment adjustment.

1) Load paper in a tray.
2) Print a sample printout and check for misalignment of the printout image.
282
3) If the printout image is misaligned, adjust the position in following order:

z Skew Adjustment
z Perpendicularity Adjustment
z
Scale Adjustment
zPrint Position Adjustment
4) Save the adjustment values.

5) Assign the saved values to a custom paper and a tray.

Save the adjustment results for squareness, skew, scale, and print position as an
alignment adjustment type, and then assign the type to the tray.
1 Load paper in a tray.

2 Press the <Log In/Out> button, and enter the
System Administrator Mode.
Appendix
<Log In/Out> button

When a password is required, select [Next]
8
Note The default user ID is 11111.
The default passcode is x-admin.

screen.

Service Settings] > [Maintenance].
283
8 Appendix
6 Select [Alignment Adjustment].
7 Select [Alignment Adjustment Type Setup],

and press [Change Settings].
8 Select the alignment adjustment type you

want to set or adjust, and press [Change
Settings].
9 Select [Name], and press [Change Settings].

Appendix
8
10 Enter the type name, and press [Save].
Important We recommend using a name such as "A4 Plain" that allows you to know what the content is.
11 Press [Sample Printout].
12 Select the tray in which you loaded paper in
Step 1, and then select both sides or single
side and the number of sheets.
Important When adjusting perpendicularity, select
A3 for the paper size.
We recommend printing about 10 sheets
in order to calculate the average value of
the variations.

The current sample printout is printed.
If the position of the sample printout is correct, a line is printed at a position 10 mm from
the edge of the paper. If the position of the line on the sample printout is misaligned,
make adjustments.
Note Two lines are printed on the image of Side 1 and one line is printed on the image of Side 2 of
the sample that is printed with [Sample Printout] to indicate the paper feed direction.
284
14 Press [Confirm].
15 Press [Close].
16 Check the sample printout, and adjust the position if misalignment has occurred.
For details on making each adjustment, refer to the following sections.
z For skew adjustment, refer to "Skew Adjustment" (P.286).
z For perpendicularity adjustment, refer to "Perpendicularity Adjustment" (P.287).
z
For scale position adjustment, refer to "Scale Adjustment" (P.288).
z For print position adjustment, refer to "Print Position Adjustment" (P.289).
17 After you finish making adjustments, print another sample printout with [Sample
Printout] and check the adjustment results.
Appendix
18 Make adjustments again if necessary. (Step 13)
19 Press [Save].
20 Press [Close].
21 Select the tray to apply the alignment 8
adjustment type that you just saved (the tray
which you loaded paper in Step 1), and then
press [Change Settings].
22 Select the adjusted alignment type and

press [Save].
285
8 Appendix
Skew Adjustment
Adjust image skewing (tilt extent) in 0.1 mm increments for each of sides 1 and 2.
Place the document so that the paper feed direction is on your right. Specify a positive
value to tilt the image counterclockwise, and specify a negative value to tilt the image
clockwise.
1 Check the sample printout, and measure the squareness offset amount that occurred.
Use the following equation to obtain the tilt extent amount, with "A" as the length of the
leading registration edge of the output sample, and "B" as the length of the trailing
registration edge of the output sample.
Skew amount = A - B
Appendix
2 Select [Skew], and press [Change Settings].
3 Enter a value with the tilt extent amount

measured in Step 1 added as the current
setting value of [Side 1] and [Side 2].
Note Entering a positive or negative value adjusts the tilt extent as shown below.
4 Press [Save].
286
Perpendicularity Adjustment
Adjust image skewing (squareness) in 0.1 mm increments for each of sides 1 and 2.
Specify a positive value when you want to adjust the position of the image in the
opposite direction to the paper feed direction, and a negative value when you want to
adjust the image in the paper feed direction.
1 Check the sample printout, and measure the squareness offset amount that occurred.
Use the following equation to obtain the squareness offset amount, with "A" as the
length of the lead registration on the back of the machine, and "B" as the length of the
lead registration on the front of the machine.
Squareness offset amount = (A - B) 400 (length of Y direction of paper - 20 mm)
For example:
When A3 is placed horizontally: (A - B) 400 277
Appendix
2 Select [Perpendicularity], and press [Change
Settings].
3 Enter a value with the squareness offset

amount measured in Step 1 added as the
current setting value of [Side 1] and [Side 2].
Note The range of values that can be entered, displayed above the entry field, may vary
depending on the settings of the machine.
If image skewing (squareness) cannot be adjusted adequately even when you have entered
the maximum or minimum value for Side 1, adjust image skewing (squareness) for Side 2.
287
8 Appendix
Entering a positive or negative value adjusts the squareness as shown below.
4 Press [Save].
Scale Adjustment
Adjust the size (scale) of the image in the paper feed direction and the vertical direction
in relation to the paper feed direction in 0.025% increments for each of sides 1 and 2.
Specify a positive value when you want to increase the scale, and a negative value
when you want to reduce it.
1 Check the sample printout, and measure the scale offset amount that occurred.
Appendix
The scale may become a negative value depending on the scale offset amount.
z Paper feed direction: X direction scale
X direction scale offset amount = image actual measurement length in the X direction
- image reference length in the X direction
X direction scale correction amount = -1 (X direction scale offset amount image
reference length in the X direction) 100
z Vertical direction in relation to the paper feed direction: Y direction scale
Y direction scale offset amount = image actual measurement length in the Y direction
- image reference length in the Y direction
Y direction scale correction amount = -1 (Y direction scale offset amount image
reference length in the Y direction) 100
288
Note The reference lengths for a sample printout of A3 or A4 size printed with [Sample Printout]
are as follows.
Image Reference Length in X Image Reference Length in Y

Paper Size
Direction Direction
A3 400 mm 277 mm
A4 190 mm 277 mm
2 Select [X%-Magnification Width] or [Y%-

Magnification Length], and press [Change
Settings].
3 Enter a value with the X direction scale

correction amount you measured in Step 1
added for the current setting value of [Side 1]
and [Side 2] of [X%].
Enter a value with the Y direction scale
correction amount you measured in Step 1
added for the current setting value of [Side 1]
and [Side 2] of [Y%].
Note The range of values that can be entered,
displayed above the entry field, may vary
Appendix
depending on the settings of the machine.
If the size (scale) of the image cannot be
adjusted adequately even when you have
entered the maximum or minimum value
for Side 1, adjust the size (scale) for Side
2. 8
4 Press [Save].

Adjust the position of the image in the paper feed direction and the vertical direction in
relation to the paper feed direction in 0.1 mm increments for each of sides 1 and 2.
Adjust the position in the paper feed direction with [X Print Position], and adjust the
position in the vertical direction in relation to the paper feed direction with [Y Print
Position].
289
8 Appendix
1 Check the sample printout, and measure the print position offset amount that
occurred.
z
X Print Position
Specify a positive value when you want to move the position of the image in the
opposite direction to the paper feed direction, and a negative value when you want
to move the position of the image in the paper feed direction.
z
Y Print Position
Specify a positive value when you want to move the position of the image toward the
back of the machine, and a negative value when you want to move the position of
the image toward the front of the machine.
2 Select [X Print Position] or [Y Print Position],
Appendix
8
3 Enter a value with the difference X measured
in Step 1 added as the current setting value
of [Side 1] and [Side 2] of [X Print Position].
Enter a value with the difference Y measured
in Step 1 added as the current setting value
of [Side 1] and [Side 2] of [Y Print Position].
Note [X Print Position]: Specify a positive value

when you want to move the position of the
image in the opposite direction to the
paper feed direction, and a negative value
when you want to move the position of the
image in the paper feed direction.
[Y Print Position]: Specify a negative
value to move the image toward the front
of the machine, or a positive value to
move it toward the rear.
4 Press [Save].
290
This section describes adjusting the fold position. You can adjust the fold position for
each paper type, and set the adjustment value to any of 10 types. You can assign the
set type to each tray.
You can adjust the fold position for single fold, booklet, C fold, Z fold, and Z fold half
sheet.
Fold Position Adjustment
1 Load the paper for adjusting the fold position in the tray.
For details on entering the System Administrator
Mode, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.98).
<Log In/Out> button
Appendix
passcode, and select [Enter]. 8
Note The default user ID is 11111.

screen.

291
8 Appendix
6 Select [Finisher Adjustment].
7 Select [Adjust Fold Position].
8 Select [Fold Position Type Setup], and press

[Change Settings].
9 Select the fold position type you want to set

Appendix
or adjust, and press [Change Settings].
8
10 Select [Name], and press [Change Settings].
11 Enter the type name, and press [Save].

Note We recommend using a name such as "Single Fold Plain" that allows you to know what the
content is.
12 Select the fold type, and press [Change Settings].

For details on making each fold adjustment, refer to the following sections.
z For single fold, refer to "Single Fold Position Adjustment" (P.294).
z For booklet, refer to "Booklet Position Adjustment" (P.295).
z For C fold, refer to "C Fold Position Adjustment" (P.296).
z For Z fold, refer to "Z Fold Position Adjustment" (P.297).
z For Z fold half sheet, refer to "Z Fold Half Sheet Position Adjustment" (P.298).
292
13 Set the necessary items, and press [Sample

Printout].
14 Select the tray in which you loaded paper in

Step 1, and then press the <Start> button.
15 Measure the fold position with a sample printout, and adjust the fold position.
16 Make adjustments to the items if necessary.
17 After you finish making adjustments, print another sample printout with [Sample
Printout] and check the adjustment results.
18 Make adjustments again if necessary. (Steps 12 to 14)
19 Press [Save].
Appendix
20 Press [Close] until the [Adjust Fold Position] screen appears.
21 Select the tray to apply the fold position
adjustment type that you just saved (the tray
which you loaded paper in Step 1), and then 8
press [Change Settings].
22 Select the adjusted fold position type and

press [Save].
293
8 Appendix
Single Fold Position Adjustment

Adjust the single fold position.
1 Select [Single Fold], and press [Change

Settings].
2 Specify [Sheets to be folded], and press

[Sample Printout].
3 Select the tray in which you loaded paper,

and press the <Start> button.
A sample printout is printed.
Appendix
4 Press [Close].
8 5 Check the printed sample printout, and measure the offset amount.
6 Select [Long at Left] or [Long at Right].
7 Enter the measurement value you obtained in Step 5 in [Value A Before Adjustment].
8 Press [Adjust].
9 Press [Sample Printout] again to print a sample printout, and check the adjustment
results.
11 Press [Save].
294
Booklet Position Adjustment

Adjust the booklet position.
1 Select [Booklet], and press [Change

Settings].

select [2-Sheet Stack], and press the <Start>
button.
Appendix
4 Select the tray in which you loaded paper, select [15-Sheet Stack], and press the
<Start> button. 8
5 Press [Close].
6 Check the sample printout, and measure the position offset amount for 2-sheet stack
and 15-sheet stack.
7 Press [Booklet Fold State (2 Sheets)].
8 Select the state of the fold and staple

position of the output paper, and enter the 2-
sheet stack offset amount you measured in
Step 6 in [Values A & B Before Adjustment].
295
8 Appendix
9 Press [Save].
10 Set [Booklet Fold State (15 Sheets)] in the
same way.
Note Adjustment is made automatically when
loading stacks of 2 to 15 sheets.
To load stacks of more than 2 or less than

15 sheets, adjust the [Variable-Sheet
Booklet] setting.
11 Press [Adjust].
results.
14 Press [Save].
Appendix
C Fold Position Adjustment

Adjust the C fold position.
1
8 Select [C Fold-A4 ] or [C Fold-8.5 x 11" ],

4 Press [Close].
296
5 Check the printed sample printout, and measure the A and B fold position movement
amounts.
6 Enter the measurement values you obtained

in Step 5 in [Values A & B Before
Adjustment], and the final value you want
after adjustment in [Desired Values A & B].
Important Set value A and value B so that an edge
of the paper does not extend past a fold
position of the paper. An edge of paper
extending past a fold position of the paper
may cause a paper jam.
7 Press [Adjust].
results.
10 Press [Save].
Appendix
Z Fold Position Adjustment
Adjust the Z fold position.
8
1 Select [Z Fold-A4 ] or [Z Fold-8.5 x 11" ],
297
8 Appendix

4 Press [Save].
amounts.
6 Enter the measurement values you obtained

Important Set value A and value B so that an edge
of the paper does not extend past a fold
position of the paper. An edge of paper
extending past a fold position of the paper
may cause a paper jam.
Appendix
7 Press [Adjust].
8 results.
10 Press [Save].
Z Fold Half Sheet Position Adjustment

Adjust the Z Fold Half Sheet position.
1 Select [Z Fold Half Sheet- A3 ], [Z Fold Half

Sheet- B4 ], [Z Fold Half Sheet-11 x 17" ],
or [Z Fold Half Sheet - 8K ], and press
[Change Settings].
298

4 Press [Save].
amounts.
Appendix
6 Enter the measurement value you obtained
Important Set value B so that an edge of the paper
does not extend past a fold position of the
8
paper. An edge of paper extending past a
fold position of the paper may cause a
paper jam.
7 Press [Adjust].
results.
10 Press [Save].
299
8 Appendix
This section describes adjusting image transfer.

You can adjust the transfer output value when image transfer is poor.
Image Transfer Adjustment

Adjust the transfer output value for each paper type.
1 Load the paper for adjusting the transfer output value in the bypass tray.
<Log In/Out> button

Appendix

8 Note The default user ID is 11111.

screen.

300
6 Select [Adjust Image Transfer].
7 Select [Paper Type].
8 Select the paper type you want to adjust,

and press [Close].
9 Adjust the value for image transfer.
Appendix
Making adjustment using [Enter Sample Number]
1) Select [Enter Sample Number] and press
[Print Sample].
2) Select the size of the paper which you

loaded in the bypass tray, and then select
[1 Sided] or [2 Sided].
3) Press the <Start> button.
301
8 Appendix
A sample printout, as shown in the following illustration, is printed.

Side1
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Appendix
+6
+7
8 +8
+9
+10
Note On the top right of the sample, "Side 1" and "Side 2" will be printed, respectively.
When the paper size is 8.5 x 11" or smaller, the sample will be printed on two separate
sheets.
4) Check the sample printout, and write down the number listed on the left (-5 to +10)
for the row which has the best image transfer.
Note If you printed out both sides of the paper, be sure to write down the number for each side.
5) Select [Enter Sample Number] and enter

the numbers you wrote down in Step 4 for
[Side 1] and [Side 2].
6) Press [Adjust].
The set transfer output value will be
applied to subsequent printouts.
302
Making adjustment using [Enter Percentage]

If you are familiar with adjusting the transfer output value, you can specify the value
without printing a sample.
1) Select [Enter Percentage], and specify the adjustment value (percentage) for [Side
1] and [Side 2]. The current output value is assumed to be 100%.
Increase the percentage value if image transfer is still poor.
2) Press [Adjust].
The set transfer output value will be applied to subsequent printouts.
10 Press [Close].
Appendix
8
303
8 Appendix
Notes and Restrictions
This section describes the notes and restrictions to observe when using the machine.
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine
Installing and Moving the Machine

z
When moving the machine to another location, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
z
When the machine is operating, do not subject it to shock.
z
When closing the document cover, be careful not to pinch your fingers.
z
Do not place any objects near the ventilation openings of the machine's exhaust fan.
Output Color
When you select [Auto Detect] in [Output Color] for a copy job or select [Color] in
[Output Color] for a print job, the machine may consume yellow, magenta, and cyan
toner cartridges and drum cartridges even when your document is black and white.
In addition, when [Background Suppression (Color Copy)] is set to [High Speed] under
[Tools] > [Common Service Settings] > [Image Quality Adjustment], yellow, magenta,
and cyan toner cartridges and drum cartridges are always used. Thus these color toner
cartridges and drum cartridges are consumed even when your document is black and
Appendix
white.
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Copy Feature

8 Copy Feature
The machine does not offer the Improves Fit feature.
Meter Count for Dual Color and Single Color Copies

Dual color and single color copies are counted as color copies.
Color Effect for Dual Color Copy

To extract colors for dual color copy, adjusting the colors of the document is required
in advance.
Our service representative performs the adjustment. Contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
Copy with Covers

When you copy a document with the [Cover] feature using the Full Size Color UI, a back
cover cannot be copied in color.
To copy a back cover in color, use the [Segment Separators] feature under [Build Job].
This restriction is not applied when you select [Back Cover] from the Middle Size Color
UI or select [Front Cover] from the Full Size Color UI.
Pages per Side for Black & White and Color Mixed Documents and Meter Count
If you copy a document that contains black & white and color pages by specifying
[Pages per Side], an output sheet that has both black & white and color pages will be
counted as a color page.
304
Notes and Restrictions
Copy and Simple Copy

You cannot switch the screen between the Copy and Simple Copy services. Return to
the [Services Home] screen, and then select a service. In that case, the settings
specified in either service are cleared.
ID Card Copy
z The machine does not shift the ID card image to the center of the output in any
magnification ratio and image size you specified.
z When the reduced size is specified to copy an ID card, the machine may copy the ID
card in a different orientation from the original orientation depending on the
magnification ratio specified.
Notes and Restrictions on the Interrupt Mode

If you press the <Interrupt> button while printing, the machine temporarily stops printing
and enters the Interrupt mode.
Note However, if the machine is scanning a document while printing, the print job cannot be
interrupted.
The jobs that can/cannot be executed during interruption are as follows:
Job Instruction
Job
Job from the
Execution
Control Panel*1
Appendix
Copy Required O
Report/List Automatic printing of a report/list other than Not required X
a Job History Report
Automatic printing of a Job History Report Not required O 8
Printing of a report/list instructed from the Required O
<Machine Status> button > [Machine
Information] > [Print Reports] on the control
panel
O The job can be executed during the Interrupt mode.

X The job cannot be executed during the Interrupt mode.
*1 The job instruction from the control panel is required/not required to execute the job.
305
Appendix 8 Appendix
306
Index
Index
Numerics Auto Paper Select .............................................. 114

Auto Print ........................................................... 109
2 Sided Copying (default value) ........................ 136 Auto Tray Switching Control .............................. 115
2 Sided Report .................................................. 119 Automatic Tray Selection ..................................... 27
A B
Access Control .................................................. 159 Back Cover ........................................................ 139

Account Administration ..................................... 177 Background Pattern (Watermark) ...................... 122
Account Limit .................................................... 153 Background Suppression (Black Copy) ............. 118
Accounting ........................................................ 152 Background Suppression (Color Copy) ............. 118
Accounting Login Screen Settings .................... 156 Background Suppression (default value) ... 136, 144
Accounting Type ............................................... 155 Background Suppression (Photo & Text) .......... 140
Accounting/Billing Device .................................. 156 Background Suppression (Scan Jobs) .............. 118
Accounting/Billing Device Settings .................... 156 Background Suppression Level ......................... 147
Adjust Image Transfer ....................................... 121 Background Suppression Level (Text) .............. 140
adjusting the paper guide .................................... 30 Base Tone ......................................................... 111
Alert Tone ......................................................... 111 Bates Stamp ...................................................... 138
Alignment Adjustment Settings ......................... 120 Billing Information ................................................ 94
Allow User to Disable Active Settings ............... 163 booklet staple cartridge (Finisher C2 with
Alternative Name for User ID .................... 156, 161 Booklet Maker) .................................................... 67
Annotation - Create Comments ........................ 142 booklet staple cartridge (Finisher D4 with
Index
annotation position adjustment ......................... 140 Booklet Maker) .................................................... 70
Annotations ....................................................... 137
Annotations - Comment Density ....................... 140 C
Apply Layout Template on Copy/Print Jobs ...... 124
Audio Tones ...................................................... 111 calibration .................................................... 79, 119
Auditron Mode ................................................... 156 capacity ............................................. 274, 277, 279
Auditron Report (Copy Jobs) .............................. 90 center binding/folding ................................ 277, 279
Auditron Report (Print Jobs) ............................... 90 Center Erase/Binding Edge Erase ..................... 137
Auditron Report (Scan Jobs) ............................... 90 changing the paper size ...................................... 40
Auditron Reports ................................................. 89 changing the paper size in Tray 3 ....................... 41
authenticated user ............................................ 170 changing the paper size in Tray 4 ....................... 43
Authentication ........................................... 159, 174 changing the paper size in Tray 6 (A4 HCF) ....... 44
Authentication/Security Settings ....................... 158 changing the paper size in Trays 1 and 2 ............ 40
Authorization Groups ........................................ 171 changing the paper size in Trays 6 and 7 (HCF
auto calibration .................................................... 79 C1-DS) ................................................................. 46
Auto Clear ......................................................... 109 changing the paper type ...................................... 47
Auto Clear Alert Tone ....................................... 111 Charge Print Jobs .............................................. 157
Auto Display of Login Screen ............................ 112 Charge/Private Print Settings ............................ 163
Auto Job Promotion .......................................... 125 checking paper tray status ................................... 87
Auto Job Release .............................................. 109 cleaning the machine ........................................... 76
Auto Paper Off .................................................. 139 Color Balance - Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black .... 136
307
color capability ...................................................272 Device Access ................................................... 160
Color Scanning ..................................................143 dimensions ................ 273, 274, 275, 277, 278, 280
Color Shift ..........................................................136 Display Consumables Screen ........................... 129
Color Space ...............................................144, 147 DocuWorks .......................................................... 86
Common Service Settings .................................108 drum cartridge ......................................... 52, 58, 62
Configuration Report ............................................88 Dual Color - Non-target Area Color ................... 135
Connect with Accounting/Billing Device .............156 Dual Color - Source Color ................................. 135
Connection Interval ............................................109 Dual Color - Target Area Color .......................... 135
Connectivity & Network Setup ...........................149 duplex automatic document feeder ................... 274
consumables ........................................................52
continuous copy .................................................273 E
continuous copy speed ......................................273
Contrast .....................................................135, 144 Edge Erase ........................................................ 136
Control Panel Alert Tone ...................................111 Edge Erase (default value) ........ 136, 137, 144, 145
Control Panel Select Tone .................................111 Encryption Key for Confidential Data ................ 130
Copy Control ......................................................139 Energy Saver mode ............................................. 14
Copy Defaults ....................................................134 Energy Saver Timers ......................................... 110
Copy Output .......................................................137 entering System Administration mode ................. 98
Copy Reports .......................................................88 entering text ......................................................... 22
Copy Service Settings .......................................133 error code .......................................................... 195
Copy Tab - Features Allocation .........................133 Error History Report ...................................... 88, 92
Cover Tray .........................................................138 extension tray ................................................ 30, 31
Create Authorization Groups .............................161
Create Text String ..............................................124 F
Index
Create/View User Accounts ...............................152

Current System Software .....................................85 Failed Access Log ............................................. 162
Custom Buttons 1 to 3 .......................................112 Fault Tone ......................................................... 111
Custom Colors ...................................................142 Faults ................................................................... 92
Custom Paper Name/Color ................................113 Feature Access ................................................. 153
Custom Watermark 1 to 3 (Watermark) .............123 feeding speed .................................................... 274
Customize Paper Supply Screen .......................114 File Format ........................................................ 144
Fine-tune 100% ................................................. 139
D Finisher Adjustment ........................................... 121
first copy output time ......................................... 272
Data Encryption .................................................130 folding ................................................ 277, 278, 279
Date ...................................................................108 Font Color (Watermark) ..................................... 122
Date Format .......................................................122 Font Size (Watermark) ...................................... 122
Date Stamp ........................................................138 Force Annotation ............................................... 123
Daylight Savings ................................................110 Force Watermark - Client Print .......................... 123
Default Language ..............................................113 Force Watermark - Copy ................................... 123
Default Print Paper Size ....................................126 Force Watermark - Print Store File .................... 123
Default Watermark (Watermark) ........................122 Front Cover ....................................................... 139
Default Watermark Effect (Watermark) ..............122
Delete All Data ...................................................120 H
Delete Layout Template .....................................124
Density (Watermark) ..........................................122 halftone/printable colors .................................... 272
308
Index
handling paper .................................................... 26 loading postcards in Trays 6 and 7 (HCF

HDD .................................................................. 272 C1-DS) ................................................................. 35
loading tab paper in Trays 6 and 7 (HCF
I C1-DS) ................................................................. 33
loading tab stock paper in Tray 5 ........................ 31
Image Enhancement ......................................... 119 loading tab stock paper in Tray 8 (Interposer) ..... 38
Image Quality .................................................... 118 local access ....................................................... 160
image quality problems ..................................... 185 Local Accounting ....................................... 155, 172
image quality processing ............................ 47, 116 local user ........................................................... 170
Image Rotation .................................................. 137 Login to Local Accounts .................................... 171
Image Rotation - Rotation Direction .................. 137 Login Type ......................................................... 159
Image Shift ........................................................ 137 Logout Confirmation Screen .............................. 162
Image Transfer Screen ..................................... 147 Low Power mode ................................................. 14
Insert Separators .............................................. 139 Low Toner Alert Tone ........................................ 111
interposer .................................................. 278, 280
Interrupt Mode ................................................... 157 M
IP Address .......................................................... 85
Machine Clock/Timers ....................................... 108
J machine configuration ......................................... 86
machine information ............................................ 85
Job Complete Tone ........................................... 111 Machine Ready Tone ........................................ 111
Job Counter Report ............................................. 89 Machine Status .................................................... 84
Job History Report ...................................... 88, 119 machine trouble ................................................. 181
Job Status ........................................................... 87 machine weight .................................................. 273
Index
Job Status Default ............................................. 163 Mask User ID (***) ..................................... 156, 161
Job Type on Job Status Screen ........................ 112 maximum fill line .................... 28, 29, 30, 31, 41, 45
Job with Insufficient Credit ................................ 157 Maximum Login Attempts by System
Administrator ..................................................... 162
K Maximum Number of Sets ................................. 141
Maximum Stored Pages ............................ 139, 146
Keyboard Input Restriction ................................ 129 memory .............................................................. 272
Memory Full Procedure ............................. 139, 146
L messages .......................................................... 195
Minimum Passcode Length ............................... 162
language ........................................................... 113 Mixed Size Originals .................................. 136, 144
Lighten/Darken .................................................. 135 Mixed Size Originals - 2 Sided Copy ................. 139
Lighten/Darken (default value) .......................... 144
loading paper ...................................................... 27 N
loading paper in Tray 3 ....................................... 28
loading paper in Tray 4 ....................................... 29 Network Controller Job Report ............................ 88
loading paper in Tray 5 ....................................... 30 notes and restrictions ........................................ 304
loading paper in Tray 6 (A4 HCF) ....................... 31 NTP Time Synchronization ................................ 109
loading paper in Tray 8 (Interposer) .................... 38
loading paper in Trays 1 and 2 ........................... 28 O
loading paper in Trays 6 and 7 (HCF C1-DS) ..... 32
Offset Stacking .................................................. 125
309
Operation of Up/Down Buttons ..........................129 power consumption ........................................... 273
Optimize PDF For Quick Web View ...................144 Power on Self Test ............................................ 120
optional components ..........................................281 power source ..................................... 274, 278, 280
Original Orientation ....................................137, 144 power supply ..................................................... 273
original paper size ..............................272, 273, 274 Print Position (Print UUID) ................................. 124
Original Size Defaults ................................141, 145 Print Position (Side2) (Print UUID) .................... 125
Original Type .............................................135, 143 Print Position Adjustment (Print UUID) .............. 125
Original Type - Auto (Black & White) .................135 print quality trouble ............................................ 185
Original Type - Auto (Non-Black & White) .........135 Print this Sample List (Watermark) .................... 123
Original Type - See-Through Paper ...................140 Print Universal Unique ID .................................. 124
Out of Paper Warning Tone ...............................111 Printer Lockout .................................................. 109
Output Color ......................................................135 printing a report/list ........................................ 82, 87
Output Color Recognition ..................................118 printing resolution .............................................. 272
Output Destination .............................................137 problem solving ................................................. 179
output paper size ...............................................272 punch waste container .................................. 72, 73
output paper weight ...........................................272 punching .................................... 275, 276, 278, 279
Output Size Defaults ..........................................146
output tray capacity ............................................273 Q
Overwrite Hard Disk .....................................91, 164
Quality/File Size ................................................ 145
P Quantity Display ................................................ 141
Pages per Side ..................................................137 R

paper color .........................................................114
Index
paper feed method/capacity ..............................274 Reduce/Enlarge ................................................. 134

paper guide ..........................................................30 Reduce/Enlarge Presets ........................... 141, 146
paper jams .........................................................220 reduction/enlargement ....................................... 272
paper size ..................................................114, 274 replacing drum cartridges .............................. 62, 66
Paper Size Settings ...........................................126 replacing toner cartridges .................................... 54
paper size/supported paper .......275, 276, 277, 278 replacing waste toner container .......................... 56
Paper Supply .....................................................134 Reports .............................................................. 119
Paper Tray Attributes .........................................113 Reset Account ................................................... 154
Paper Tray Attributes During Loading ...............114 Reset Total Impressions .................................... 154
Paper Tray Attributes on Setup Screen .............114 Reset User Accounts ......................................... 154
paper tray capacity ............................................273 Resolution ......................................................... 144
Paper Tray Priority .............................................114
Paper Tray Settings ...........................................113 S
paper type ....................................................24, 113
Paper Type Priority ............................................115 Sample Job ....................................................... 137
paper weight ......................................................274 Saturation .................................................. 135, 146
Passcode Entry from Control Panel ...................162 Scan Ahead for Copy Job ................................. 157
Passcode Policy ................................................162 Scan Defaults .................................................... 143
periodical replacement parts ................................52 Scan File Transfer Report ................................. 119
Photo & Text Recognition ..................................118 Scan Service Settings ....................................... 143
Photo & Text/Printed Original ............................140 scanning resolution ................................... 272, 273
Photo Reproduction Level .................................118 scanning speed ................................................. 274
310
Index
Screen After Auto Clear .................................... 112 Time Server Address ......................................... 109
Screen Brightness ............................................. 113 Time Zone ......................................................... 110
Screen Default .................................................. 112 toner cartridge ............................................... 52, 54
Screen/Button Settings ..................................... 112 Tools menu list .................................................. 101
semi standard paper ........................................... 25 Track Print Jobs ................................................. 156
Serial Number ..................................................... 85 Track Scan Jobs ................................................ 157
Service Access ................................................. 160 Track with Cumulative Device ........................... 157
Service Rep. Restricted Operation ................... 131 Tray 5 - Paper Size Defaults ............................. 115
Services Home .................................................. 112 tray capacity .............................. 275, 276, 277, 279
Services Home - Additional Features ............... 112 tray type ..................................... 275, 276, 277, 278
Setup ................................................................. 151 trouble during copying ....................................... 191
Shadow Suppression ........................................ 144 troubleshooting .................................................. 180
Shadow Suppression Level .............................. 147 types of authentication ....................................... 171
Sharpness ......................................................... 135
Sharpness (default value) ................................. 144 U
Single Color ...................................................... 135
Sleep mode ......................................................... 14 unable to copy ................................................... 191
Software Download ........................................... 131 Uncollated - Default Separators Tray ................ 137
Software Options .............................................. 120 unit (millimeters/inches) ..................................... 129
software version .................................................. 86 unregistered user ............................................... 170
space requirement ............................................ 273 unusable paper .................................................... 26
space requirements (when connected to the USB ..................................................................... 86
main unit) .................. 274, 275, 276, 277, 278, 280 User Account Billing Information ......................... 95
standard paper .................................................... 25 User Details Setup ............................................. 161
Index
staple cartridge for Finisher C2 ........................... 52 User ID for Login ............................................... 162
staple cartridge for Finisher C2 with Booklet User Role ........................................................... 154
Maker .................................................................. 52 UUID .................................................................. 124
staple cartridge for Finisher D4 ........................... 52
staple cartridge for Finisher D4 with Booklet W
Maker .................................................................. 52
staple jam .................................. 261, 262, 264, 265 warm-up time ..................................................... 272
staple waste container ........................................ 74 waste toner container .................................... 52, 56
stapler faults ...................................................... 260 Watermark ......................................................... 122
stapling ...................................... 275, 276, 277, 279 Watermark/Background Contrast
Stored Programming Tone ................................ 112 (Watermark) ....................................................... 122
storing paper ....................................................... 26 Website ................................................................ 85
Supplies .............................................................. 93 weight ................................ 274, 275, 277, 278, 280
System Administrator Settings .......................... 158
System Administrators Login ID ....................... 158 X
System Administrators Meter (Copy Jobs) ....... 155
System Administrators Passcode .................... 158 Xerox Standard Accounting ............................... 155
XPS ..................................................................... 86
TIFF Format ...................................................... 147

Time .................................................................. 108
311
312
Index
Color 550/560 Printer
Administrator Guide
DE4632E2-1 (Edition 1)
January 2011
Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Copyright 2011 by Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
Printed in China
Color 550 Printer
Color 560 Printer

Color 550 Printer
Color 560 Printer
Administrator Guide
Administrator Guide
Edition 1 January 2011 DE4632E2-1 898E 00390

Ag-C560p C550P PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ag-C560p C550P PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Color 550 Printer

Color 560 Printer

Edition 1 January 2011 DE4632E2-1 898E 00390

In this manual, safety instructions are preceded by the symbol .

Table of Contents ........................................................................................................ 3

1 Before Using the Machine ........................................................................................ 9

2 Paper and Other Media ........................................................................................... 23

4 Machine Status .........................................................................................................83

6 Authentication and Accounting Features ............................................................167

7 Problem Solving ................................................................................................... 179

This guide is intended for system administrators, and provides maintenance

The following guides are provided with the machine.

Before Using the Machine

Administrator Guide (this guide)

Using This Guide

This guide is intended for system administrators, and provides maintenance

information such as how to replace consumables, and troubleshooting procedures.

Organization of This Guide

1 Before Using the Machine

2 Paper and Other Media

6 Authentication and Account Administration

z The following symbols are used in this guide:

Before Using the Machine

LEF Orientation SEF Orientation

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Energy Saver Mode

Low Power Mode

Changing the Interval for Entering Energy Saver Mode

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

<Log In/Out> button

2 Enter the system administrators user ID with

Before Using the Machine

3 Select [Tools] on the [Services Home]

5 Select [Energy Saver Timers], and then

6 Using [ ] and [ ], set the time to elapse until

From Last Operation to Low Power Mode

From Last Operation to Sleep Mode

Customizing the Control Panel

Before Using the Machine

Changing the Screen Default

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

<Log In/Out> button

2 Enter the system administrators user ID with

3 Select [Tools] on the [Services Home]

4 Select [System Settings] > [Common

5 Select [Screen Default], and then select

6 Select a service you want to display.

Setting the Screen After Auto Clear

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

<Log In/Out> button

2 Enter the system administrators user ID with

3 Select [Tools] on the [Services Home]

4 Select [System Settings] > [Common

Before Using the Machine

Assigning Services to <Custom> Buttons

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

<Log In/Out> button

2 Enter the system administrators user ID with

and enter the system administrators

3 Select [Tools] on the [Services Home]

5 Select [Custom Button 2], and then select

6 Select [Stored Programming].

Adjusting Screen Brightness